JP2021041085A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a game machine that includes game control means capable of executing a game and performance control means capable of executing a performance related to the game, the performance control means can execute a performance of a first performance mode as a performance related to the game and can switch the performance of the first performance mode that is executed as the performance related to the game, to a performance of a second performance mode that has a different predetermined parameter from that in the first performance mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 34

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine including a game control means capable of executing a game and an effect control means capable of executing an effect related to the game.

In a conventional game machine, there is a game machine that executes a predetermined effect together with fluctuating identification information and displays it on a display screen (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2019-10356

However, while the player's expectation for a big hit can be fueled as the production mode of a predetermined production is emphasized and becomes more flashy, there is a problem that the visibility of the identification information deteriorates, which may reduce the interest of the game. There is.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of the game in the game machine.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, in a game machine including a game control means capable of executing a game and an effect control means capable of executing an effect related to the game, the effect control means is attached to the game. As a related effect, the effect of the first effect mode can be executed, and the effect of the first effect mode executed as the effect related to the game is a second effect having a predetermined parameter different from that of the first effect mode. It is possible to switch to the production of the production mode.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the game machine.

It is a perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common processing. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a sorting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hit system command processing. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing when the saturation of a reach effect changes. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition when the reach effect develops into SP3 reach during the variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition when the reach effect ends with SP2 reach during a variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, and is a modification of the screen transition when the reach effect develops into SP3 reach during the variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is the 2nd modification of the screen transition when the reach effect develops into SP3 reach during a variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition when the reach effect becomes a battle effect and develops into SP3 reach during the variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is a modification of the screen transition when the reach effect becomes a battle effect and develops into SP3 reach during the variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition when the zone effect is generated by the reach effect during the variable display game and develops into SP3 reach. It is a figure explaining the change example of the appearance of the identification information when a predetermined parameter is changed. It is a time chart which shows the occurrence timing of the predetermined effect (one event) according to the second embodiment, and the specific effect (related display, related effect) related to the predetermined effect (No. 1). It is a time chart which shows the occurrence timing of the predetermined effect (one event) according to the second embodiment, and the specific effect (related display, related effect) related to the predetermined effect (No. 2). The second embodiment is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (No. 1). The second embodiment is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (No. 2). The second embodiment is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (No. 3). The second embodiment is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (No. 4). It is a figure which shows the example of the effect A (zone effect) and its related display on the display screen of a display device. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect B (mission effect) and its related display on the display screen of a display device. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect C (pseudo continuous effect) and its related display on the display screen of the display device. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect D (precursor effect) and its related display (hold change effect, etc.) on the display screen of the display device. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the precursor effect on the display screen of a display device. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of the fanfare production which is executed after the jackpot result is derived in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of the fanfare production which is executed after the jackpot result is derived in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 3 of the fanfare production which is executed after the jackpot result is derived in the 2nd Embodiment. In the second embodiment, it is a time chart relating to the display of an image as a specific effect. In the second embodiment, it is a figure which shows the example which the list of predetermined productions is displayed while waiting for a customer. It is a figure explaining the display screen of the display device in the player setting mode in 2nd Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the game machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen by the player during the game.

[Overall view of the game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The game machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge. The opening / closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30 can be accessed. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

Decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of producing light emission according to the game state are arranged in the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the game machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the game machine 10 and projects forward (on the player side) is arranged. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the protrusion effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game (game) displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game (game) corresponding to the start memory in advance. The variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply a variable display game, it is referred to as a special figure variable display game in this specification.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during the non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special game state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific game state, a state in which a special result (for example, a big hit) is likely to occur in a variable display game (probability variation state, a probability fluctuation state), or a big hit state (special game state). ).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Further, it may be possible to always generate a probabilistic state when a big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate a probabilistic state by a big hit symbol random number, or to provide a winning device or the like provided with a specific area to specify. A probabilistic state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated when a player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is a button for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the game machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 is a device that houses a lighting member such as an LED inside and performs a light emitting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on the front side portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored in the lower part of the front frame 12 below the glass frame 15 provided with the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the firing force, which is the force (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be played in various launch modes having different launching forces. Can fire a ball. The launch mode includes a left-handed hit (normal hit) in which the game ball is allowed to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and a right-handed hit in which the game ball is caused to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball extraction hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball extraction hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball pulling hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball pulling hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to launch a game ball from a ball launcher into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variablely displays (variablely displays) a plurality of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the displayed contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and a character that directs the variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is placed in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win a prize.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper part and the right side of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d form a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided, and a second starting winning opening (second start winning area) is provided immediately below the start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36. An ordinary variable winning device 37 provided with a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts the game ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory, and rotates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. It opens and changes to an open state (a state in which the game ball is easy to win, which is advantageous for the player), in which the game ball easily flows into the normally variable winning device 37.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of a winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map variation display game and setting the hit probability of the normal map variation display game to a higher probability than usual, or a normal game state. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the above-mentioned specific game state, a time-saving state (general electric support state) is generated. In addition, even in the probabilistic state (excluding the latent probabilistic state), the time saving state (normal power support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 at the lower right of the normal variable winning device 37, an attacker-type opening / closing door is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side by the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). A special variable winning device 39 having a 39c is provided. The special variable prize device 39 converts the large prize opening from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and wins a large prize. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the mouth, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the large winning opening, a count switch 39a (large winning opening switch 39a, see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. In addition, a light emitting member that illuminates the large winning opening is arranged in the large winning opening or in the vicinity of the large winning opening.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the probability change state (high probability state, specific game state) after the end of the big hit is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time so that the game ball can easily pass through only in the case of a probability variation jackpot. The game control device 100 can detect the passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V prize) via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like, and when the V prize is detected, the game shifts to a probable change state after the jackpot ends. In addition to confirming that the operation is to be performed, information (such as a command for passing through a specific area) indicating that a V prize has been won is transmitted to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V prize on the display device 41 or the like.

When a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the large winning opening of the special variable winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) determines the type of winning opening. The number of prize balls corresponding to the above is discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the game area 32 below the normal variable winning device 37, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided. The batch display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), the fluctuation display unit 53 (normal figure display, lamps D10, D18) for the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the start (hold) storage number of each fluctuation display game. It has a storage display unit for notification (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, normal figure hold display 56). Special figure 1 The hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The normal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

Further, the batch display device 50 is informed that it is a right-handed hit (when it should be right-handed) or a left-handed hit (normal hitting time), and the first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp). D8), the second game state display unit 58 (second game state display, lamp D9) that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is high. The third game status display unit 59 (third game status display, probability status display unit, lamp D17) that displays the status, and the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 39 is opened and closed) are displayed. A round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D7) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variation display game is executed by the variation display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, or when a variable display is executed. In addition, all the LEDs provided as indicators turn on and off all (simultaneous blinking of all LEDs), circular lighting (turns on and off in a predetermined order from any one LED at predetermined time intervals), or a plurality of LEDs. It may be performed by turning on / off (blinking) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the normal diagram display 53, the variation display game is executed by the variation display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the normal figure display 53 can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the lamp display device 80 provided on the upper part of the center case 40 includes a lamp display unit (LED) that executes a variable display (blinking) that repeats a lighting display and an extinguishing display as a symbol (fourth special symbol), and each special symbol. It has a lamp display unit (LED) for notifying the start (hold) storage number of the variable display game. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later). The lamp display unit (LED) for starting (holding) storage number notification of each special figure fluctuation display game ends the display of the number of holds due to the occurrence of a big hit, but when it is not in the big hit state (reach described later on the display device 41). (Including the case where is occurring), the number of holds is displayed.

Next, the flow of the game in the game machine 10, the normal map variation display game, and the special map variation display game will be described in detail.

In the game machine 10, a game is performed by launching a game ball toward the game area 32 from a ball launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening. 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39 is won, or the ball flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 39, a number of winning balls corresponding to the type of winning winning opening is dispensed through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

The normal drawing start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state in which the normal map fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been played and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or when the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, it is normal. When the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, the storage number is added (+1) if the normal drawing start storage number is less than the upper limit number.

The hit judgment random value for determining the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored in the normal figure start memory, and when the hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal figure change display is displayed. The game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal map variation display game is executed by the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50. The normal figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (normal figure) is lit and a deviation when the normal identification information (normal figure) is off, and the normal identification information fluctuates by blinking the LED. The display is performed, and after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the normal figure display 53 stops in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is special figure 2. It is detected as a start winning ball of a variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The number of special figure start prize memories stored is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.

The special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) have identification information (identification information) on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. This is performed by displaying the special symbol (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the predetermined result mode. Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started, the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various effect displays such as the appearance of characters in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol (blinking) is repeated (blinking) in the lamp display unit (LED) of the lamp display device 80. 4th symbol) fluctuates. The fluctuation display of the lamp display unit is stopped after a predetermined time from the start by "lighting" in the case of a miss and "turning off" in the case of a big hit.

On the contrary, the variable display of the lamp display unit (LED) as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) can be stopped by "turning off" in the case of a miss and "turning on" in the case of a big hit. .. In addition, a plurality of LEDs (fourth symbol LEDs) are provided as each lamp display unit, and one of the plurality of LEDs is lit in the case of disconnection, and all the plurality of LEDs are lit in the case of a big hit. It is possible.

When the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of winning is the jackpot value), the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 1 display 51 or the special In the display 52 of FIG. 2, a specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol as a result of the special figure variation display game, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). That is, the large winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 opens wide until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, during which the player is given the privilege of being able to acquire a large number of game balls. To.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate indicators or the same indicator, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed in different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is prevented from being executed at the same time. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a memory of starting the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure variation display game can be executed, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch 39a. Uses a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that has a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. .. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is used as a machine. Microswitches with similar contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). A data bus 140 that connects a CPU unit 110 having a 111 (referred to as), an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120, and an output unit 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. , A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of a power failure. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output a control signal such as.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to exclude it from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forced. The process of initializing to is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 makes it possible to change the probability set value (set value) according to the setting related to the game condition (game) by turning it on by the operator's rotation operation or the like. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability (only when there is a small hit), but other game conditions (directing, etc.) other than the probability. Can be changed according to the probability setting value. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute a setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) related to the game condition. In addition to the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the setting value changing switch, or may provide a dedicated setting value changing switch.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 and are arranged at a position (inaccessible position) that cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Will be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on (power failure recovery, power recovery), the game machine 10 sets a probability setting value according to the on / off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in, for example, 6 steps, and the probability setting value 1 (setting 1), the probability setting value 2 (setting 2), the probability setting value 3 (setting 3), and the probability setting value 4 (setting). 4), there are a probability setting value 5 (setting 5) and a probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1) → Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) ) → Setting value 5 (Setting 6, probability setting value 6) → Setting value 0 (Setting 1) → Setting value 1 (Setting 2) → ... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For convenience of explanation, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. It may be treated as the same in the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the work set value and the probability set value are set to the same value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to 6 steps. Then, the performance display device 152 in which the display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting values 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display. Etc. are displayed.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination value of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control. Information on the game (game information) is stored, and the stored information is stored even if a power failure occurs. Is a possible retention and storage means. As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where the display is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system (type) of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expectations are different), normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected degree (expected value) of the jackpot of the reach production is increased in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The degree of expectation of the production (notice) suggests the probability that the production will be a big hit when the production is selected, and the selection rate of the production when it is a big hit and the selection rate of the production when it is not a big hit (when it is off). It can be calculated based on the selectivity and the like.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot of a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. Symbol random numbers (only when there is a small hit), fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in various reach and fluctuation display without reach) Based on the random number generation circuit for generation and the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, the timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (millisecond)) and the update timing of the random number generation circuit are given to the CPU 111a. It has a clock generator that generates a clock.

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the start memory number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the game control device 100 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal drawing start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning opening 36. These are connected to the switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37 (normal variable winning device), the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, and the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided in which a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the switch is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72 detects the passage of the game ball (V winning) into the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge port that discharges the game ball from the special variable winning device 39. The out-ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game balls that pass through the out port 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been launched into the game area and finished the game.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. A signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., and a signal from the vibration sensor 65 that detects the vibration of the game machine 10 are input. ..

Further, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The first input port 122 that takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23. The frame radio wave invalid signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal is in a state where the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal variable winning device 37, a large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid) to open the special variable winning device 39, and the like. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / close data of the lever solenoid 86b that operates the lever to open the specific area 86.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the game machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and provides information about the game machine 10 to the outside. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is a first driver (drive circuit) that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal by receiving open / close data signals of the general electric current solenoid 37c and the grand prize opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134. 138a, the second driver 138b that outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal 71. Is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via a segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via a digit wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence with, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and receives the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driving driver 150 is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality of (4) 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display (LED lamp), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another location. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, an accessory ratio, a ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls as a performance display.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winning balls), and the number of games that have passed through the out opening 30b. It is the total with the number of spheres. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 or the like. In the present embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and A special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) is included.

The payout rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of launched balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls ÷ number of ejected balls) × 100 (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 ejected balls.

For example, the bonus ratio is in the jackpot state out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning a prize in the winning opening during a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (= so-called continuous character ratio) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening. The bonus ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize opening (= the large winning opening ratio) to the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large prize opening and the ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= the so-called bonus ratio (total bonus ratio) commonly used )) May be used.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the game machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 of the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. The wait signal WAIT and the like for this is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F331. Receive as. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device having an LED (light emitting diode) (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like). A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. The board decoration device 46 may include the above-mentioned lamp display device 80.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the 335 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IOReSET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random value for hit determination in the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and ROM 111b. Compared with the judgment value stored in, the hit / miss of the normal figure variation display game is judged.

Then, after displaying the identification symbol on the normal map display 53 in a predetermined time variation, the normal map variation display game in which the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display 53, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example). , 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display 53 is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the start winning (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is made based on the starting memory. The random value for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / miss of the special figure 1 variation display game.

Further, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is memorized based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 after the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make.

Further, the effect control device 300 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Let me. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a controls, for example, by opening the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 by the large winning opening solenoid 39b to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. ..

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the time saving operation state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled as compared with the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operating state. Since the game is controlled so that the opening time of the game is substantially increased, the game is in the normal power support state. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the time saving state is duplicated and the normal electric support is executed.

For example, in the time-reduced state, it is possible to shorten the time so that the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game is set to the second fluctuation display time shorter than the normal first fluctuation display time (for example). 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). Is.

Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening number (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to one hit result of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map variation display game (normal figure probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. Further, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operating state (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As described above, the state shifts to four states (modes) depending on the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) is changed to a variable setting state (setting change state, setting change mode). (See A1027-A1036 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 6B).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (FIG. FIG. 5B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 6B).

If the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) and the RAM initialization process (RAM clear). The process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), and the power is simply recovered.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as "A ***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until is normally started is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated or the power is turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed at the time of turning on the power cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. Can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the player waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

When the power failure has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009), and determines whether or not the value of the timer is 0. (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, when the standby time ends, the game control device 100 has a read / write RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1011), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 for driving the performance display device 152 (state display device) may be initially set. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of digits used in the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM111c) (A1015). Here, the flag of the assumption of abnormality is once set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). Then, if it is normal (the result of A1016 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. The calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power failure match (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal and the RAM error flag indicating a RAM error is cleared (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM error flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the variable setting state (setting change mode), and executes the process during the probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. ..

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM 111c). It is determined whether or not it is done (A1022). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), the process of confirming the probability setting in steps A1031-A1037 (during the setting confirmation state and the setting confirmation mode), in step A1041-144 The RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) or the process at the time of normal power-on (power recovery) in steps A1041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

The game control device 100 notifies that the game control device 100 (main board, main board) has an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1023 is “Y”). An error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024). The effect control device 300 that has received the command for notifying the main abnormality error notifies that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 uses the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) when the game is stopped on the performance display device 152. Is output to (A1025). Then, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even when the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on) is performed again to wait for the power to be turned on. While the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait and wait, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game process and the normal figure game process. Since (Fig. 7) cannot be executed, the game (special figure variation display game, normal figure variation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, if the setting change operation (both on operation of both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not executed, but the probability setting changing flag is set, there is an abnormality. , A1024-A1026 is executed. For example, when the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been executed. is there.

On the other hand, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1022 is "Y"), the game control device 100 notifies the game control device 100 (main board) that there is an abnormality in the main abnormality error notification. The command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) when the game is stopped is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025). ), The on-data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 in order to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). As described above, even when the information about the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y"), it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, so the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared. After setting the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (A1028), the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1029). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N"), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029). Next, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1030), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), And when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the process of confirming the probability setting (during the setting confirmation state) starts, and the probability The probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command under confirmation of probability setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processes during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

First, the game control device 100 saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation (A1034). The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change / confirmation process (FIG. 6B) described later, but remain when the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation is completed early. The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed by the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms while the probability setting is being changed and the probability setting is being confirmed.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interrupts (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the process at the time of the power failure in steps A1055-A1061 is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power failure does not occur, the probability setting value can be confirmed in the variable setting state (setting change state, setting change mode) or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation status (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1038), and issues a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1039). The effect control device 300 that has received the command to end the notification ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization process (described later) in steps A1042-A1044 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform the normal processing of.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is “N”) (A1041). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is “Y”), the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is cleared to 0 in the RAM 111c (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. Further, in addition to the probability setting value area, a configuration that does not clear the stack area and the unused area, a work area related to the performance information and its display (performance display), and a configuration that does not clear the stack area are also possible. .. The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, for example, the ball output rate, the base value (the ball output rate in the normal game state), the accessory ratio, the number of ejected balls, and the like. is there.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 has a normal power supply because both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1041 is “N”). The process at the time of turning on (when the power is restored) is started, and the power failure restoration process is executed (A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (power recovery) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A1047. Move to the processing of.

The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command at the time of recovery from a power failure transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of the game machine and the hold of special figures 1 and 2. Ornament special figure 1 indicating the number Hold number command and decoration special figure 2 Hold number command, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) or time saving state, special figure change in a predetermined production mode It includes a production count information command that indicates the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command that indicates that the power has been turned on.

Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery include the setting value information command (probability setting value information) indicating the setting value information (setting information) which is the information of the probability setting value (setting value) of the game machine 10. Command) is included. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command displays, for example, a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the board decoration device 46 or the like. Do it for a second. Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41. Note that the screen designation command is a customer waiting demo command for both Special Figures 1 and 2 during normal processing (when neither fluctuating nor hitting), and is a recovery screen command otherwise.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (big hit symbol random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol). Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), small hit symbol random number that determines the small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number) (only when there is a small hit), hit random number that determines the hit of the normal figure Save in a predetermined area of RWM (A1048) as the start value of the initial value (random number of initial value per hit), the initial value of the random number of the fall lottery used in the fall lottery (random number of the initial value of the fall lottery), etc. ). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the processing.

In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, hit symbol random numbers, and fall lottery random numbers, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. ing. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, the performance information (such as the accessory ratio and the ball output rate) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM error flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if it is not cleared in step A1042). After that, interrupts are permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the process of steps A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts processing at the time of a power failure, temporarily disables interrupts (A1055), and outputs off-data to all output ports (A1055). 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the game waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from register bank 0 used in main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input from various sensors and switches, capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

The game control device 100 is an actuator such as a solenoid (for example, a large winning opening solenoid 39b) based on the output data set in various processes when the probability setting is not changed or the probability setting is not confirmed (the result of A1304 is “N”). Output processing for performing drive control, LED drive control (light emission control), and the like is executed (A1306). When a launch prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, the launch permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1307) that outputs commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, and further, random number update process 1 (A1308) and random number update. Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a, and error monitoring (the front frame and the glass frame are opened). The winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed (A1310).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of the game ball is occurring at the large winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318) described later, it can be determined that the abnormal discharge is occurring. When abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is “Y”), the processes after step A1315 are executed.

When the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure game process for performing the process related to the special figure variation display game (A1312). The details of the special figure game processing will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal map game process that performs a process related to the normal map variation display game (A1313). A segment LED editing process is executed (A1314), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents (A1314).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1316).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, the abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring the abnormal discharge from the large winning opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the abnormal discharge of the special variable winning device 39 is based on the inputs from the large winning port switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning port switch), and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 of the special variable winning device 39. Is monitored, and when an abnormal discharge occurs, the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set. The game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 is discharged through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball ejection port switch 73.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1319). Then, the performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1320). After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

When returning the timer interrupt processing, the interrupt disabled state is restored and the register bank specification is automatically restored. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after the external information editing processing. Processing or processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change / confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. In the probability setting change / confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability set value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value (A2402), and the performance display device 152 Is output via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability set value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), the extinguishing data is set as the probability set value display data (A2403), and the data is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). ).

Here, the probability set value display data is display probability set value data displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability set value display data area. In order to prevent confusion among people involved in the hall, if the probability setting values are different but the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the jackpot probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1034. Subsequently, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer) or the like) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A2407 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100 is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A2407 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting is being changed. Whether or not it is determined (A2408). When it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent a situation in which the probability set value is unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is held down.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 when it is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is “N”) (A2409). When there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends.

When the game control device 100 receives an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the work set value in the work set value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) in the range of 0 to 5. Along with updating by +1 the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the probability setting value area are updated by +1 according to the work setting value (A2410). As a result, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by 1 each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated. After that, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. In the work setting value area (RAM111c or register) for storing the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value). The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the work setting value, but the work setting value of the RAM 111c is updated. The probability setting value (work setting value) during the setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the work setting is set. The value corresponding to the work setting value in the value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, when a power failure occurs during the setting change (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the probability setting value used for game control, effect control, etc. (probability setting stored in the probability setting value area) It is possible to prevent the situation where the value) is changed by an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game processing. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

First, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins a game ball in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and a special figure variation display based on the winning is displayed. Predetermine the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the game. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a large winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game processing number when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up. The special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process is set in the register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired by using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with the special figure game processing number to execute the game branching process according to the special figure game processing number (A2607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure variation display game, sets the variation start of the special figure variation display game, sets the effect, and sets the effect. The special figure normal processing for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure changing processing is executed (A2608). The details of the special figure normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure, sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure display, and the like. Figure The processing during fluctuation is executed (A2609). For example, in the special symbol changing process, necessary information such as a symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set, and the process number "2" related to the special symbol display process is set. Set and save in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the type of jackpot and sets each jackpot if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a jackpot. The special figure display processing for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the necessary information such as the fanfare command and the fanfare time is set, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing is set. Save to the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit, the process number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and performs processing during opening of the large winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A2611). For example, in the fanfare / interval processing, necessary information such as the round command corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the large winning opening is set, and the processing number "4" related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Set and save in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round. The processing during the opening of the large winning opening is executed (A2612), in which information necessary for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set. For example, in the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command is set, a processing number "5" related to the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged if the big hit round is the final round. The big winning opening remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is executed (A2613). For example, in the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing is set, and the special figure game processing number area is set. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "6" related to the jackpot end processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "6" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure normal process (A2614). For example, in the jackpot end processing, the probability state after the jackpot state ends and the normal power support state after the jackpot state ends (the public power support state after the jackpot state ends) based on the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (big hit symbol number) of the special figure fluctuation display game Set necessary information such as (time saving state), set the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing, and save it in the special figure game processing number area. The probability fluctuation judgment data includes the number of continuous games (number of time reduction fluctuations, number of electric support) of the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the jackpot state and the normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state. ) Information is included.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2615), and then the special figure 1 display. The symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2616). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2617), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2618).

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36. (A2703). If there is no winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processes after step A2709 are executed. On the other hand, when there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is shortened (during the normal electric support state) (A2704).

When it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the special time reduction period (during the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A2707. On the other hand, when the special figure time is shortened (the result of A2704 is "Y"), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and the effect command setting process is executed (A2705). A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

That is, in the normal electric support state (time saving state), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. .. In the case of the present embodiment, it is easier to win a prize in the starting winning opening 36 by hitting the left side, and the normal variable winning device 37 must be hit by the right side to win a prize. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 unless it is hit right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 during the normal power support state (that is, during the normal power support state). When left-handed), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing right-handed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information of the hold by the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure starting opening switch common process (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning in the second starting winning opening is determined. Judgment (A2711). If there is no winning in the second starting opening winning opening (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when there is a prize in the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning can be won (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the illegal electric power is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent prizes to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the Fuden fraud is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) when the normal electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , The special figure start port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, even when it is determined in A2713 that an illegal operation is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a procedure for common processing of the special drawing start port switch. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output number of times is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number of times overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, in the game control device 100, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the number of special figure reservations (start memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2912), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2913). In the special figure hold information determination process, the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the saved jackpot random number and the stop symbol information based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the first half variation number based on the saved variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (number of variation before reach). And the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number (number of fluctuation after reach) is set as an effect command. Then, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as the effect command (A2914), and the effect command setting process (A2915) is executed to be common to the special figure start port switch. End the process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing a predetermined number as a start memory up to an upper limit. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. It is stored, and various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is 0 (A3206). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has started (A3211), and when the customer waiting demo has not started (A3211). The result of (A3212) is that the customer waiting demo flag area is set to the customer waiting demo flag area (A3212).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as an effect command (A3213), performs an effect command setting process (A3214), and proceeds to the process of step A3215. On the other hand, in step A3211, when the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of A3211 is "Y"), "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (A3215), and the special figure game processing number. The processing number is saved in the area (A3216), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3217). Then, the flag is saved during the fraud monitoring period in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202), and the decorative feature corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number. The figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3204). Then, the process transition setting process during the special figure change of the special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the normal process of the special figure is terminated.

Further, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207), and the decorative feature corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. The figure hold number command (decorative special figure 1 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3208), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3209). Then, the process transition setting process during the change of the special figure of the special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the normal process of the special figure is terminated.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation display based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3207) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting the jackpot flag 1 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) related to the special figure 1 variation display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol number at the time of a miss or a big hit and the missed stop symbol pattern or the jackpot stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number are saved. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is executed. In addition, the number of rounds information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stop symbol number and the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number are acquired and saved.

Further, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405). ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number), which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406). Next, the game control device 100 executes the variation start information setting process (A3407) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game, and ends the special figure 1 variation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is performed. Further, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the number of reserved special figures related to the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure variation display game to be started is updated by -1 (decreased by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 11 for the second start memory. It is something to do.

First, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3501). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 2 setting process for setting the jackpot flag 2 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) related to the special figure 2 variation display game (A3503). Further, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set, is prepared (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3507), and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3601). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (A3603). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3604).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the loss information is saved in step A3601. Save (A3606) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is not a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "N"), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this process, the same process as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 13 is performed for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3701). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3704).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is not a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "N"), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information that the jackpot flag 2 is out of alignment. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3605, A3704) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing, the jackpot flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than the jackpot) as the determination result (A3807), and ends the jackpot determination process. To do.

Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in the high probability state (probability variation state). (A3803). Then, in the case of a high probability state (the result of A3803 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3803 is "N"), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A3805).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3806). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3806 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A3807). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3806 is "N"), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A3808). When the judgment result is set, the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting processing (A3404, A3504) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In the present embodiment, the probability state (low probability / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

First, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group selection pointer table (A4201) and acquires the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (A4203), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4204). ..

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the added value in the variable distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of outliers. Therefore, in cases other than outliers, the number of holdes does not affect the distribution of fluctuations in the first half as a result. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the latter half variation group selection pointer table (A4207) and acquires the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4208). Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (A4209), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4210).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the added value in the variation distribution information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special figure information. End the process. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than the loss, the number of holds will be distributed to the latter half fluctuation as a result. Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting processing (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. The latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (A4301), acquires the address of the latter half variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2 (A4302), prepares the address, and prepares the target variable pattern random number. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4303). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the one for hitting and the one for hitting. Specifically, the hit size is 1 byte size, and the loss size is 2 byte size. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and even one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order (A4304), and if it is out of order (the result of A4304 is “Y”), performs a 2-byte distribution process (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If it is not out of alignment (the result of A4304 is "N"), the sorting process (A4306) is performed, and the process proceeds to the process of step A4307.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares (A4307) the address of the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, and holds the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (hold). Load the variation pattern random number 2 from (for equation 1) and prepare it (A4308). Then, the distribution process is executed (A4309), the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (A4310). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4313), and the variation pattern random number is generated from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1). Load 3 and prepare (A4314). After that, the distribution process (A4315) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (A4316), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4305) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 2-byte distribution process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the selection table (second half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (A4401). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

Then, when the first data in the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. Then (A4407), the 2-byte distribution process is completed. On the other hand, when the first data of the selection table (second half variable group table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "N"), the first distribution specified in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is specified. Get the value (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A4303 (A4404), and the calculated new random number value is calculated. Is less than "0" (A4405). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403, which is followed by the process. Subsequent processing is performed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A4405 to create a new disturbance. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

The above process is executed in step A4405 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the latter half variable selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variable selection table defined in the selection table (second half variable group table). Then, in step A4405, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result (A4407), and 2 bytes. The sorting process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution processing (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sorting process. In the distribution process, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation selection table) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation pattern group).

First, the game control device 100 starts with the head data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). Check if is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that stores the distribution value of, but does not need to be distributed, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, in the game control device 100, when the first data of the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is "Y"), The address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (A4507), and the distribution process is completed. On the other hand, if the first data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is "N"), the target selection table (second half fluctuation). The first distribution value specified in the group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random number values (values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314. Then, a new random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process proceeds to step A4503, which is followed by the process. Subsequent processing is performed.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the randomness determined in the previous step A4505 is acquired. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and first half fluctuation pattern (first half) specified in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) One of the latter half fluctuation selection tables, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) is selected from the fluctuation number).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result. (A4507), the sorting process is completed.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (A4603). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A4606), and saves the added value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607). After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4609), and the effect command setting process is performed (A4610). ). Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (A1310) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal figure game processing. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general electric winning switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the normal game processing timer is not 0 (A7603). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is set to the normal figure game processing number. A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the game process number of the game based on the set game sequence branch table of the game (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made based on the game processing number of the game, and the game branching process according to the game processing number of the game is executed (A7607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the fluctuation start of the normal map variation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the normal map variation display game, sets the effect, and sets the effect. The normal processing is executed (A7608), in which information necessary for performing the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map is set. The details of the normal processing will be described later in FIG. 22.

Further, when the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal map changing process for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing (the game control device 100). A7609). For example, in the normal map fluctuation processing, in order to shift to the normal map display process, "2" is set as the game processing number and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map display time is set to the normal map game. Save to the processing timer area.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, if the result of the normal map variation display game is a hit, the normal power according to whether or not the time is shortened. The normal map display processing is executed (A7610), in which the opening time is set, the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per-game processing is set, and the like. For example, in the normal map display process, when the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, "3" is set as the game process number and the normal map game process number area is set in order to shift to the normal map hit process. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, in order to shift to the normal game processing number, "0" is set as the game processing number and the game is saved in the normal game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the game control device 100 normally continues the processing during the normal drawing or sets the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing. The middle process per figure is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal processing per figure, after setting to open the normal variable winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game processing number in order to shift to the normal electric remaining ball processing. Save to the normal game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal electric remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing (A7612). ). For example, in the Fuden remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the Fuzu hit end processing, "5" is set as the game processing number and saved in the Fuzu game processing number area, and the Fuzu ending time is set to the Fuzu game. Save to the processing timer area.

Further, when the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal drawing end processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the normal figure per end process, "0" is set as the game process number and saved in the normal figure game process number area in order to shift to the normal figure normal process.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal map fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal map display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A7614 when the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (A7608) in the normal drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure for normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of reserved figures is 0 (A7901). When the number of holdings of the normal figure is 0 (the result of A7901 is "Y"), the normal process transition setting process 1 of the normal figure is executed (A7923), and the normal process of the normal figure is terminated. In the normal-figure normal processing transition setting process 1, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the normal-figure game processing number area in order to shift to the normal-figure normal processing.

Further, when the number of reserved numbers in the game control device 100 is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads a random number per RWM from the random number storage area per normal figure (for the number of reserved numbers 1), and RWM. The hit symbol random number is loaded from the normal symbol per symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A7902). Then, the random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) and the symbol random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) are cleared to 0 (A7903). Furthermore, whether or not the probability of winning in the normal map fluctuation display game is higher than usual in the normal map high probability (in the high probability state), that is, whether or not the time is shortened (normal power support state). (A7904). The probability of hitting a normal figure in a high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a normal figure in a low probability is 0/251.

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability of the normal figure (the result of A7904 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (251 in this case) which is the lower limit judgment value in the low probability of the normal figure (A7905). , When the high probability of the normal figure is in progress (the result of A7904 is "Y"), the high probability lower limit judgment value (1 in this case) which is the lower limit judgment value in the high probability of the normal figure is set (A7906), and the step A7907 is performed. Move to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7907). The upper limit judgment value here is common to the high probability of the normal map and the low probability of the normal figure. If the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "Y"), that is, if it is out of order, the process proceeds to step A7909. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7908).

The game control device 100 saves the hit flag area when the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7908 is "Y"), that is, when the hit flag area is missed (A7909). Further, the out-of-order stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A7910), the out-of-order symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7911), and the process proceeds to step A7915.

When the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7908 is "N"), that is, in the case of hit, the game control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7912) and converts it into the loaded hit symbol random number. The corresponding stop symbol number is set (A7913), the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. There may be several types of hit stop symbols.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A7915) and saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7916). Next, prepare a Fuzu command corresponding to information related to the Fuzu variation display game (particularly information on hit / miss of the Fuzu variation display game) as an effect command (A7917), and execute the effect command setting process. (A7918). Then, the random number storage area per normal figure is shifted (A7919), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A79220), and then the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (A7921).

That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the rankings of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 that are held after the normal figure holding number 1 are moved up one by one. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 of the random number storage area per the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the process transition setting process during the normal map change (A7922), and ends the normal map normal process. In the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process, in order to shift to the normal map fluctuation processing, "1" is set as the game processing number and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map fluctuation time is saved in the normal map game processing number area. Save to the game processing timer area.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (directing microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the game machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (B0001). Next, the initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are executed (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 can be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is started with the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002) and monitors whether or not the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes an RTC reading process for reading time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 (B0009).

The RTC reading process may be configured to read the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process shifts to step B0009. The RTC reading process may be executed only once when the power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, the power is turned on to the game machine 10) (the position of the RTC reading process may be changed, for example, steps B0003 and B0004). May be executed between). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on, the time is set from the RTC 338 only once. When the information is read, the time timer (timekeeping means) may be adjusted to match the time of RTC338. Then, the effect control device 300 may execute various processes by using the time timer. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (the signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, the hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED or liquid crystal by the person in charge of the game hall (game store) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode processing, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process for adding or clearing the effect points (B0012). In the effect point control process, the effect points are added by executing the effect or operation for which the effect points are to be added, and at the end of the game so that the effect points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on production points and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode processing.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes a customer waiting demo editing process (B0015) that edits and controls the content of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41, and determines the power saving state of the game machine 10 waiting for the customer. The power saving control process to be controlled is executed (B0016).

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The effect display editing process to be performed is executed (B0017). As for the drawing data set at this time, the image of the display device 41 can be updated without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the process of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0020). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), for example. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0023). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of B0023 described above, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. After that, the processes from B0008 to B0023 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reception command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of command receptions in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of commands received is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the analysis command area. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing direct analysis in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content of the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the content of the received command. The process is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25 below. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the step. The processing of B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the reception command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE unit (MODE command) and an ACTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from the MODE unit indicating the type of command. To. Therefore, the upper and lower ranks of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type) that can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific production instruction, etc.) is determined. Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by a command of the type specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, for example, a variable command (A3407). Then, when the MODE unit represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the jackpot command (B1207). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to an effect during a jackpot. For example, a fanfare command (A2610) for commanding a fanfare screen or a round screen is commanded. Round command (A2611) for commanding, interval command (A2612) for commanding the interval screen, ending command (A2612) for commanding the ending screen, and the like. Then, when the MODE unit represents a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the jackpot command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). The symbol-based commands include, for example, decorative special symbol commands (A3403, A3503) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE unit represents a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). .. The look-ahead symbol command includes, for example, the look-ahead stop symbol command (A2913). Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead symbol-based command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol-based command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the look-ahead symbol command (the result of B1213 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (B1215). ). The look-ahead variation command includes, for example, the look-ahead variation pattern command (A2913). Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the ACTION part for the MODE part is not the correct combination ( The result of B1204 is "N"), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the game machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE unit represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the model designation command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the RAM initialization command (B1303). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and the single-shot command process is performed. finish.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a power failure recovery command when the MODE unit does not represent a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N") (the result of B1303 is "N"). B1305). For example, there are a power failure recovery command and a recovery screen command as power failure recovery commands. Then, when the MODE unit represents a power failure recovery system command (the result of B1305 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a power failure recovery system command (the result of B1305 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command. (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is “Y”), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B1312), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). Then, when the MODE unit represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

If the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an error / invalid command (". B1315). Note that, as error / illegal commands, for example, an illegal occurrence command, an illegal release command, a state off command, a state on command, a magnet illegal notification command (magnetic error command), and a panel radio wave illegal notification command (panel radio error command) are available. is there. As the fraud occurrence command, there is a command indicating the occurrence of a fraudulent prize based on the signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a. The fraud release command is a command indicating the fraud release. In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (A1310), the occurrence of fraudulent winning and the cancellation of fraud are monitored, and the fraud occurrence command and the fraud release command can be transmitted. As a status on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and a signal is generated from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) (main body frame opening error, front frame). There is a command indicating (open error). In addition, the state off command indicates that no error has occurred. A status on command and a status off command can be transmitted in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (A1310). When there is a detection (magnet fraud) from the magnetic sensor switch 61, a magnet fraud notification command is transmitted in the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315). When there is a detection (radio wave fraud) from the radio wave sensor 62, a panel radio wave fraud notification command is transmitted in the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316).

Then, when the MODE section represents an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or invalidity is executed (B1316). Terminates single-shot command processing. In the error / invalid setting process, it is set to generate an error or invalid notification sound.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the MODE unit then issues a command for switching the effect mode (processing during special figure display). Etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 does not represent the command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), then the MODE section represents the out ball number command indicating the number of out balls. Whether or not it is determined (B1319). Then, when the MODE unit represents the out-ball number command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out-ball number reception processing is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the out-ball count command (the result of B1319 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the count command (large winning opening count command). (B1321). Then, when the MODE unit represents the count command of the large winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a set value information command (probability set value information command) when the MODE unit does not represent a count command (the result of B1321 is “N”). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1046 of FIG. 6B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. Then, when the MODE unit represents the set value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the set value reception processing, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as RAM and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE unit does not represent the setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the setting change type command (B1325). As a command for changing the setting, for example, there is a command (A1030) for changing the probability setting. Then, when the MODE unit represents a setting change system command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are memorized and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for which the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change system information setting process, a setting changing display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a setting confirmation command when the MODE unit does not represent a setting change command (the result of B1325 is “N”) (B1327). .. As a command for setting confirmation, for example, there is a command (A1033) for confirming probability setting. Then, when the MODE unit represents a setting confirmation system command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are memorized and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command during probability setting confirmation is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the display device 41.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a command to stop the symbol (B1329). The symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command of special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). Then, when the MODE section represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command (". B1330).

When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and the game is played after all the symbols are stopped. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1332), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of B1332, the game state flag is set to the normal state as an example, but the game state flag is a flag of "changing", "big hit", and "small hit" depending on the timing when this process is executed. Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N"), or when the command of the MODE section is not normal (the result of B1330 is "N"), the effect control device. 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute a process for a command not shown in FIG. 26. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a start winning command indicating that the start winning opening 36 and / or the normal variable winning device 37 has won a prize from the game control device 100, and responds to the start winning command from the speaker. It may be set to generate a start winning sound that notifies the player that there is a start winning.

[Look-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the details of the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (B1214) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold information is the information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is the information of special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is set to the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold. Save (B1602).

In the effect control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag indicating that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B1604). This is because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are set, and the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variable command following the look-ahead symbol command. After that, the look-ahead symbol command processing is terminated.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the details of the look-ahead variable command process (B1216) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading variation command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the read-ahead fluctuation system command (look-ahead fluctuation pattern command) is waiting to be received (B1701). When the above-mentioned look-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. When the read-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is being waited for (the result of B1701 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds of the latest hold information symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (B1703), and sets a look-ahead variation MODE command (B1703). Acquires the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit corresponding to the MODE unit (B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT section corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACTION section (ACT section) is acquired (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and ACT unit) are both other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a command other than 0. When both the MODE section and ACT section after conversion are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the MODE section and ACT section after conversion corresponds to the latest hold information and the number of holds. Save in the look-ahead fluctuation command area (special figure 1 look-ahead change command area or special figure 2 look-ahead change command area) (B1708). Then, the look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (B1710).

It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is changed and the display game is started. Hold changes When starting a display game, if there are no other holds, the first half will be longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half fluctuation is changed, the MODE section of the received look-ahead fluctuation command is converted into the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holdings, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command ACT section does not depend on the number of holdings. However, since there are different types of reach for the same system, if the effect control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT section (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. .. For example, there are various types of normal reach, such as normal reach-1 stop off and normal reach +1 stop off. Therefore, by converting the ACT unit showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the burden of the check processing such as the pre-reading command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, in the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE unit and ACT unit) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or If the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), it is considered that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

When the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (the result of B1710 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 loads the hold information (latest hold information) to be read ahead from the look-ahead fluctuation command area. (B1711), a look-ahead lottery process relating to the latest hold look-ahead effect is executed (B1712). The look-ahead effect includes, for example, a continuous advance notice effect (including a chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a hold change advance notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) occurs (B1713). When the latest hold look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect (holding change notice, etc.) that occurs is an effect that immediately starts (B1715). When the generated look-ahead effect is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). If the pre-reading effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"), set and save the display corresponding to the pre-reading effect at the time of hold shift (when the hold display is moved or when the number of holds is reduced) (B1717). ). Then, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the latest hold look-ahead effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the look-ahead variable command process as it is.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 sets a special symbol type corresponding to the MODE unit of the received symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE unit and the ACTION unit (ACT unit) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol type is an outlier symbol, a 4R probability variation jackpot symbol (4R-A1, symbol 1), a 4R normal jackpot symbol (4R-A2, symbol 2), and an 8R probability variation jackpot symbol (8R-A1, symbol 1). It corresponds to the symbol 3), the 8R normal jackpot symbol (8R-A2, symbol 4), the 12R probability variation jackpot symbol (12R-A1, symbol 5), and the 12R normal jackpot symbol (12R-A2, symbol 6).

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variable system command (variable command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in the production, such as when a design command of a jackpot symbol is received even though a variable command of an outlier is received. If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) when the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904). A variation effect setting process for setting a certain variation effect is executed (B1905). There are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 30) described above will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the first half notice distribution group corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, and setting information (set value). The address table is set (B2002), and the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

When the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is reach fluctuation, the effect control device 300 includes the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode. Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting information (set value) (B2004), and set the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variable pattern type. Get the address (B2005).

The effect control device 300 draws a lottery for advance notices that appear during the first half fluctuation (before reach) after steps B2003 and B2005 (B2006). Next, set the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and setting information (set value) (B2007), and ACT the variable command. The address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the department is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE section and the ACT section of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010). In addition, the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). After that, the stop symbol of the decorative special figure variation display game is determined according to the content of the variation effect such as the reach effect and the advance notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of the out-of-order symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the variable effect (B2013) and sets the display of the notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is set, and for example, the display in which the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that fluctuates this time is reduced is set (B2015). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.) and emits light in a light emitting mode (color, light emitting timing, etc. of each LED) defined by a decoration number. ..

It is also possible to set the voice number and the decoration number based on the setting information (setting value) as well as the effect content. In this way, the player can enjoy inferring the setting information (set value) of the game machine 10 from the light emitting mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type (B2017), and the fourth special symbol other than the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate in the display device 41. The display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol variation may be displayed by the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41, or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41. May be good.

[Hit system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the details of the hit command process (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 25) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hit system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit of the received hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). If the MODE part of the hit command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the hit command is a big hit fanfare command (or a small hit fanfare command if there is a small hit), the fanfare effect is set. The fanfare effect setting process for this is executed (B2102). The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10 is set to during fanfare (B2103), and the hit system command processing is terminated. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents a round when the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"). B2104). When the MODE unit represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is a round command (or a command during which the small hit is open if there is a small hit), the effect control device 300 determines the round effect. The setting process is executed, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10 is set during the round (B2105, B2106), and the hit system command process is terminated.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents an interval (the result of B2104 is "N"). B2107). When the MODE unit represents an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the game of the current game machine 10. The game status flag indicating the status (P machine status) is set during the interval (B2108, B2109), and the hit system command processing is terminated. (In addition, if there is a small hit and the big winning opening is opened only once in the small hit, that is, if the small hit is one round, there is no interval command.)

When the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent the interval (the result of B2107 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents the ending (the result of B2107 is "N"). B2110). When the MODE unit represents the ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is the ending command (or the small hit end screen command if there is a small hit), the effect control device 300 determines the ending effect. The ending effect setting process for setting is executed, the ending is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit system command process is terminated. ..

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent the ending (the result of B2110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the hit command process without executing any process. To do.

[Timing chart where the saturation of the reach effect changes]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the timing at which the effect control device 300 changes the saturation as a predetermined parameter of the reach effect will be described.

FIG. 33 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing at which the saturation of the reach effect changes. The time (time) on the horizontal axis of the timing chart is the time (time) from immediately before the start (start of fluctuation) of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the reach effect is executed. The arrows (a) to (ki) shown in FIGS. 33 (A) and 33 (B) correspond to the numbers in the screen transition diagrams of FIGS. 34 and 35, which will be described later.

First, in FIG. 33 (A), a reach state occurs in the variable display game (special figure variable display game), and after the special 2 reach (SP2 reach) is executed as the reach effect, the special 3 reach (SP3 reach) is performed. This is an example of a timing chart when the reach production develops.

The effect control device 300 corresponds to the variable command (variable command) set based on the lottery (distribution), and in step B2010 of the variable effect setting process, the type of reach (N reach, SP1-SP3 reach, premier). Select (decide) the reach) and production. For example, an effect that evolves from SP2 reach to SP3 reach can be performed when SP3 reach is selected.

The expected degree of production (notice) in which the result of the variable display game is a big hit (special result), that is, the expected degree of big hit (expected value) is set higher in the order of N reach <SP1 reach <SP2 reach <SP3 reach. To. The degree of expectation suggests the probability of becoming a big hit when the effect is selected, and is calculated based on the selection rate of the effect when it is a big hit and the selection rate of the effect when it is not a big hit (when it is off). can do.

As shown in FIG. 33 (A), when a reach effect that develops into SP3 reach is performed, the variable display game is started at time t1, a reach state occurs from time t2, and N reach is performed as a reach effect in the first half of the reach. Will be executed. During the variation display game before the reach state occurs, that is, from time t1 to time t2, the variation is normal.

After that, at time t3, which is the latter half of the reach, the N reach develops into the SP2 reach, and at the time t4, the SP2 reach further develops into the SP3 reach. Then, at time t5, the reach effect ends and the fluctuation stops.

At that time, when the SP2 reach is started at the time t3, the effect control device 300 can display an image, a moving image (movie), or the like as a reach effect by the SP2 reach on the display screen of the display device 41. Further, the reach effect by the SP2 reach is displayed on the display screen in a state of low saturation (first effect mode), for example. The low saturation state is a state in which the color of an image or moving image is light (faded state), and the saturation is 0 as shown in FIG. 33 (A) and FIG. 34 (E) described later (E). It may include a monochrome state (a state without color, a state without color).

In this way, by lowering the saturation of the reach effect, it is possible to achieve a calm effect and maintain a high saturation state (color state, the same state as the effect of the second effect mode described later). The identification information (decorative special pattern) is easy to see, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. In addition, when the reach production is a Japanese-style (Japanese-style) production based on Japanese paintings, etc., the low saturation makes it easier for the player to feel the taste of the Japanese taste. You can improve your interest. The identification information is not limited to the mode in which the entire identification information displayed on the display screen is maintained in a highly saturated state as in the following embodiment, and only a part of the identification information is highly saturated. It may be maintained in a state.

Subsequently, immediately before the time t4 when the SP2 reach develops into the SP3 reach, the effect control device 300 puts an image or a moving image in a low saturation state into a highly saturated state (color state, second effect mode). Change. For example, the effect control device 300 may change an image, a moving image, or the like to a state of high saturation according to the effect mode of the reach effect by SP2 reach. Since the SP3 reach is executed in a state of high saturation, the player can increase the expectation for the big hit.

In this way, by changing the saturation of the reach effect from a low state to a high state, that is, by switching from the effect of the first effect mode to the effect of the second effect mode, an unexpected effect can be produced. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, since it is possible to emphasize the dynamic production mode when developing into SP3 reach by saturation, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation for a big hit, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

After that, at time t5, the SP3 reach effect ends and the fluctuation stops. When the fluctuation stops at time t5, the reach effect is hidden (no image).

As shown in FIG. 33 (A), images and moving images peculiar to the reach effect (excluding the image of the identification information and the moving image (variation)) are displayed when the fluctuation is stopped, during normal fluctuation, and during N reach. Although not (no image (or no moving image)), other effects such as a look-ahead notice effect may be displayed to change the saturation. Further, the saturation may be changed by starting a unique image, moving image, or the like during N reach.

Further, during SP2 reach and SP3 reach, images and moving images peculiar to the reach effect are displayed on the display screen, but as shown by the broken line in FIG. 33 (A), the peculiar images and the like are temporarily not displayed. An effect of displaying (no image) may be performed. By adopting such a production mode, it is possible to produce an unexpected production, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the reach effect displayed in the high saturation state during the SP3 reach may be temporarily displayed in the low saturation state as shown by the broken line in FIG. 33 (A). By adopting such a production mode, it is possible to produce an unexpected production, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Subsequently, FIG. 33B is an example of a timing chart in which a reach state occurs in the variable display game (special figure variable display game), SP2 reach is executed as a reach effect, and then the variable stops as it is. .. The timings of the fluctuation start, the normal fluctuation, and the N reach up to the time t3 are the same as those in FIG. 33 (A).

As shown in FIG. 33 (B), when the SP reach is executed and then the fluctuation is stopped as it is, the N reach develops into the SP2 reach at the time t3, and then the SP2 reach effect ends at the time t4 and the fluctuation is stopped.

At that time, the SP2 reach is started at the time t3, and the state in which the saturation of the image, the moving image, etc. is low is maintained by the reach effect by the SP2 reach until the fluctuation stops at the time t4. When the fluctuation stops at time t4, the reach effect is hidden (no image).

As in FIG. 33 (A) described above, an effect of temporarily hiding (no image) a unique image or the like during SP2 reach may be performed as shown by a broken line in FIG. 33 (B). ..

[Screen transition example of SP3 reach development pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, an example of screen transition when the reach effect develops from SP2 reach to SP3 reach at the timing of the timing chart of FIG. 33 (A) will be described.

FIG. 34 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of screen transitions when the reach effect develops into SP3 reach during the variable display game.

(A) of FIG. 34 is a display screen of the display device 41 before the variable display game (special figure variable display game, game) is started, that is, at the time of the arrow (A) of FIG. 33 (A).

A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41. In the variable display area 610, the left area 610A has the decorative first symbol A (identification information, symbol, decorative special symbol), the right area 610B has the decorative first symbol B, and the middle area 610C has the decorative first symbol C. Is enlarged and displayed with a large symbol, for example, stopped and displayed with a symbol "612".

Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen, a variable display area 615 in which the variable display game is executed by a decorative special symbol (small symbol) is provided. The small symbol of the variable display area 615 is stopped and displayed with a symbol of, for example, "612". The results of the variable display of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 are in agreement with each other. Further, when the variable display game is being executed, at least one of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

In the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, a special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and a special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 are provided. The special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 display a number "3" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and a number "0" indicating the special figure 2 hold number, respectively. ..

At the bottom of the display screen of the display device 41, as a start storage display area, a square frame holding digestion area 640 (specific display unit, changing hold display area), a first hold display unit 630a, and a second hold display unit 630b are provided. Is provided.

In the hold digestion area 640, as will be described later in FIG. 34 (i) and later, a hold display (start memory display, special figure change hold display) corresponding to the start memory related to the variable display game being executed (during digestion) is displayed. , Special figure digestion pending display), variable pending display 633a is displayed.

Further, the first hold display unit 630a displays the hold display 633 (starting memory display) corresponding to the generated first start memory, and for example, three hold displays 633 are displayed. Further, the second hold display unit 630b can display the hold display corresponding to the generated second start memory.

When the variable display game is started, the three hold displays 633 displayed on the first hold display unit 630a move one by one to the right (hold shift), and one at the right end of the first hold display unit 630a. One hold display 633 is moved to the hold digestion area 640, and the changing hold display 633a is displayed in the square frame of the hold digestion area 640 as shown in FIG. 34 (i).

(I) of FIG. 34 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the fluctuation display game is started and normally fluctuates, that is, when the arrow (I) of FIG. 33 (A) is used.

When the variable display game is executed in response to the variable display 633a displayed in the pending digestion area 640 due to the hold shift, the decorative first symbols A to C (large symbols) are displayed in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen. ) Is displayed as a fluctuation (“↓↓↓”) in a normal fluctuation mode. Similarly, in the variable display area 615 in the lower right corner of the display screen, the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) is variablely displayed (“↓↓↓”) in a normal variable mode.

FIG. 34 (c) shows the display device 41 when N reach is executed as the reach effect of the first half of the reach and the variable display game is in the reach state, that is, when the arrow (c) in FIG. 33 (A) is used. This is the display screen.

When N reach is executed as the reach effect of the first half of the reach by the effect control device 300, in the variable display area 610, the decoration first symbol A of the left area 610A and the decoration first symbol B of the right area 610B are, for example, " It temporarily stops with the symbol "4" displayed, and enters the reach state. Further, in the middle region 610C, the decorative first symbol C is maintained in a variable display (“↓”) state.

Here, for example, the decorative first symbols A and B that are temporarily stopped (swaying and fluctuating) with the symbol of "4" are displayed in a color based on blue (blue color display). Therefore, the decorative first symbols A and B are displayed in a highly saturated state. The decorative first symbol C, which is displayed in a variable manner, can also be displayed in a color set for each symbol (number), that is, in a state of high saturation.

FIG. 34 (E) is a display screen of the display device 41 when SP2 reach is being executed as a reach effect in the latter half of the reach, that is, when the arrow (E) in FIG. 33 (A) is used.

When SP2 reach is executed by developing from N reach by the effect control device 300, the first decorative symbol A of the left region 610A of the variable display area 610 and the first decorative symbol B of the right region 610B are placed on both upper ends of the screen. Each is displayed small. The first decorative symbols A and B are maintained in a temporarily stopped state (for example, temporarily stopped at "4"), and a blue color display is maintained.

When SP2 reach is executed, the tiger character 767 is displayed in the center of the display screen as an image peculiar to the reach effect. The tiger character 767 is displayed in a low saturation state, for example, in monochrome (a state in which the saturation is 0).

Further, the decorative first symbol C of the middle region 610C of the variable display area 610 moves from the right edge of the display screen toward the center, that is, toward the tiger character 767, unlike the direction of the fluctuation (movement) of (c). Come (fly). At that time, the decorative first symbol C of the middle region 610C is displayed in a color based on, for example, green (greenish color display). Therefore, the decorative first symbols A to C in the SP2 reach are all displayed in a highly saturated state.

In this way, while the effect control device 300 displays the tiger character 767 in monochrome (during the execution of the effect in the first effect mode), the effect control device 300 displays the first symbol C decorated in color (the first). (The same state as the production of the 2 production modes), the visibility of the decoration first symbol C is improved, and the player can easily see the design at the time of the reach production, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 34 (O) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the reach effect by SP2 reach is further advanced than that of FIG. 34 (E), that is, when the arrow (O) in FIG. 33 (A) is used.

As the reach effect by SP2 reach progresses, the decoration first symbol C in the middle region 610C moves to a position where it overlaps with the tiger character 767. By moving the decorative first symbol C in this way, it is possible to make the player who is visually recognizing the display screen recognize that the decorative first symbol C collides with (collides with) the tiger character 767. it can.

At that time, a spark-like display 768 may be provided around the decorative first symbol C and the tiger character 767 so that the effect mode in which the decorative first symbol C collides with the tiger character 767 can be emphasized. For example, in (O) of FIG. 34, a red, that is, a highly saturated spark-like display 768 is displayed around the decoration first symbol C (red spark). In this way, by displaying the spark-like display 768 in red around the decorative first symbol C that is displaying the green color, the display mode of the spark-like display 768 becomes a complementary color. It can be emphasized. The spark-shaped display 768 may be displayed in a color other than red, and may be displayed in a rainbow color or the like to suggest that the expectation of a big hit is high, for example. Further, also in FIG. 33 (A), at the time of (O), the saturation may be momentarily increased in response to the spark-like display 768 and then returned to the original state immediately.

Further, in order to make it easier to understand that the collision has occurred, a line such as "Itai!" May be displayed around the tiger character 767, or the line may be notified by a voice corresponding to the tiger character 767. .. Further, the sound may be generated in accordance with the spark-shaped display 768 to emphasize the colliding effect mode.

Further, the effect control device 300 may perform a freeze effect that freezes (pauses) the effect at the time of collision between the decorative first symbol C and the tiger character 767, or before and after the collision, and reproduces the effect in slow motion. Slow motion production may be performed. In this way, by performing the freeze effect and the slow motion effect according to the collision effect, it is possible to emphasize the effect mode at the time of the collision and before and after the collision, and it is possible to make the player easily recognize the effect mode. It can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

The (ka) of FIG. 34 is a display device after the reach effect by the SP2 reach further progresses than the (o) of FIG. 34 and the collision effect occurs, that is, at the time of the arrow (ka) of FIG. 33 (A). It is a display screen of 41.

The decorative first symbol C displayed at the position overlapping the tiger character 767 then changes the moving direction in a direction substantially parallel to the direction of the fluctuation (movement) of (u), and the lower part of the display screen is outside the screen. Move to. By moving the decorative first symbol C in this way, the player can be made to recognize that the decorative first symbol C that collides with the tiger character 767 is an effect mode in which the decorative first symbol C falls downward.

Further, while the greenish color display of the decorative first symbol C is maintained, the tiger character 767 displayed in monochrome is displayed in color as shown in (or) of FIG. 34. That is, the display of the tiger character 767, which is a predetermined image other than the decorative symbol (decorative special symbol), shifts from the low saturation state to the high saturation state after the collision effect.

Therefore, in addition to the fact that the decoration first symbol C moves out of the lower screen and does not stop, the player can continue the reach effect by visually recognizing the tiger character 767 that has moved to the highly saturated state. Since it is possible to raise the expectation that the SP2 reach will further develop into the SP3 reach, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

After that, as the reach production develops into SP3 reach as shown by the arrow extending from (or) in FIG. 34, the player's expectation raised by the SP2 reach production can be further fueled, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. Can be enhanced. The highly saturated state may be maintained by maintaining the color display of the tiger character 767 even during the SP3 reach.

The transition to the color display of the tiger character 767 may be performed at the time of (O) in FIG. 34, that is, when the decorative first symbol C overlaps with the tiger character 767. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize the production mode in which the collision occurs, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the transition to the color display of the tiger character 767 may be performed before the decorative first symbol C overlaps with the tiger character 767. By doing so, it becomes easy to attract the player's attention before the collision production, and it becomes easy to draw attention to the production, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the decorative first symbol C may be moved to the outside of the screen other than the lower part after the collision effect, and may be faded out or semi-transparent. For example, when the symbol "5" of the decoration first symbol C is faded out or translucent, the next symbol "6" may be displayed by fading in or untransparent. When the symbol "5" of the decoration first symbol C is moved to the outside of the screen, the next symbol "6" may be displayed in the same manner as in (e) of FIG. 34, and the SP3 reach effect is produced. It may be displayed according to the production. Further, the decorative first symbol C may be displayed in a small variation "↓" at the upper part of the screen at a position that does not impair the visibility of the SP3 reach effect, for example, as in the decorative first symbols A and B, and may be hidden. Only the variable display area 615 may be displayed.

Further, the display mode (transition mode) of the tiger character 767, such as the color, is not limited to the case where it develops into SP3 reach, and may be changed according to the gaming state and the expectation of a big hit.

For example, when the expectation of a big hit is high, by displaying the tiger character 767 in color from the beginning (from the time of appearance to the start of display), the player's expectation for the big hit is fueled and the interest of the game is enhanced. be able to.

Further, when the tiger character 767 is in the normal electric support state in the time saving state (specific game state), the transition to the color display of the tiger character 767 may occur at a high frequency. The normal electric support state is a state in which the general electric support is generated in which the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is substantially long. The time saving state can be shifted after the big hit game with an even number symbol such as "444" is completed, and the execution of the variable display game a predetermined number of times is the upper limit (for example, 100 times), and the normal variable display game and the normal variable winning device are used. 37 is in a state of short-time operation.

Further, even in the case of the probability change state (high probability state, specific game state), the tiger character 767 may be displayed in color from the beginning. The probability variation state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game will be a big hit (special result) is higher than usual, and can be shifted after the big hit game with an odd number symbol such as "777" is completed. In addition, even in the probabilistic state, the time saving state and the general electric support state occur in duplicate.

[Screen transition example of SP2 reach end pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, an example of screen transition in the case where the reach effect ends with the SP2 reach at the timing of the timing chart of FIG. 33 (B) will be described.

FIG. 35 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of screen transitions when the reach effect ends with SP2 reach during the variable display game. The display screen of the display device 41 at the time of the arrows (A) to (E) in FIG. 33 (B) is the arrows (A) to (E) in FIG. 33 (A), that is, the above-mentioned (A). )-(E) is the same as the screen transition example, so the description will be omitted.

(O) of FIG. 35 is a display screen of the display device 41 at the time of the arrow (O) of FIG. 33 (B), and is the same as (O) of FIG. 34.

(Or 2) of FIG. 35 is after the reach effect by SP2 reach progresses further than (O) of FIG. 35 and the effect of collision occurs, that is, at the time of the arrow (or 2) of FIG. 33 (B). This is the display screen of the display device 41.

The decorative first symbol C (symbol "5") displayed at a position overlapping the tiger character 767 then moves out of the screen at the bottom of the display screen. Further, the next symbol "6" of the decorative first symbol C is displayed from the upper part of the display screen. The tiger character 767 remains displayed in black and white. That is, when the reach effect ends with the SP2 reach, the tiger character 767 is maintained in a low saturation state. Therefore, the player who visually recognizes the effect that the tiger character 767 is maintained in a low saturation state can recognize during the SP2 reach that the jackpot expectation is low and there is a high possibility that the tiger character 767 will not develop into the SP3 reach. ..

FIG. 35 (ki) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the fluctuation is stopped after the reach effect of SP2 reach, that is, when the arrow (ki) in FIG. 33 (B) is displayed.

When the reach effect ends with the SP reach and the variable display game ends, the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, for example, with a stop symbol of "464". Stop fluctuating.

Further, the symbol "6" of the decorative first symbol C is displayed in, for example, a color based on blue (blue color display). In this way, for example, by displaying an even number of symbols that do not shift to the probabilistic state after the big hit game in a blue color display, the visibility is improved, and the reach state (probability change reach state) due to the symbols that shift to the probabilistic state after the big hit is improved. Since it is easy to distinguish, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The odd-numbered symbols that shift to the probabilistic state may be displayed in the same green color as the symbol "5", and other colors such as a red color display may be assigned to each symbol number of the odd-numbered symbols. May be good.

When the variable display game ends, the variable pending display 633a displayed in the square frame of the reserved digestion area 640 is hidden.

[Modification example of screen transition of SP3 reach development pattern (some color change pattern)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a modified example of the screen transition in the case of developing to SP3 reach will be described.

FIG. 36 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is a modified example of the screen transition when the reach effect develops into SP3 reach during the variable display game.

(O) of FIG. 36 is a display screen of the display device 41 at the time of the arrow (O) of FIG. 33 (A), and is the same as (O) of FIG. 34.

(Or 3) of FIG. 36 is a display screen of the display device 41 after the reach effect by SP2 reach further progresses from FIG. 36 (O) and the effect of collision occurs.

In this modification, for example, when the decoration first symbol C overlapping the tiger character 767 moves downward, the effect control device 300 displays a part of the tiger character 767 displayed in monochrome in FIG. 36. Display in color as shown in the circled part by the line (or 3). For example, a portion (partial color) of the tiger character 767 displayed in color is in normal color display (in normal color mode), i.e. the usual colors of the tiger character 767 (eg, yellow and black as the base color). It can be switched to a general tiger pattern).

On the other hand, the portion of the tiger character 767 that is not circled by the line (or 3) in FIG. 36 is maintained in monochrome display.

Therefore, after the collision effect occurs, only a part of the tiger character 767 displayed in monochrome (first effect mode) is switched to the color display (second effect mode) in the normal color mode. The reach production by SP2 reach can be made into a production that is unexpected for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

After that, the reach production develops from SP2 reach to SP3 reach. Therefore, the player can raise the expectation for the big hit from the unexpected production, and can further improve the interest of the game.

[Second modification of screen transition of SP3 reach development pattern (partially colored (transfer) pattern)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a second modification of the screen transition in the case of developing to SP3 reach will be described.

FIG. 37 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is a second modification of the screen transition when the reach effect develops into SP3 reach during the variable display game.

(O) of FIG. 37 is a display screen of the display device 41 at the time of the arrow (O) of FIG. 33 (A), and is the same as (O) of FIGS. 34 and 36.

FIG. 37 (or 4) is a display screen of the display device 41 after the reach effect by SP2 reach further progresses from FIG. 37 (O) and the effect of collision occurs.

In the second modification, the effect control device 300 displays, for example, a part of the tiger character 767 displayed in monochrome when the decorative first symbol C overlapping the tiger character 767 moves downward. It is displayed in color as shown in the circled part of 37 (or 4).

Here, for example, the part (partially green) displayed in color of the tiger character 767 was displayed in color in the normal color mode in FIG. 36 (or 3) of the first modification, but this second modification In the example, the decoration can be displayed in a greenish color as in the first symbol C.

In this way, by displaying the part displayed in the color of the tiger character 767 in a color similar to that of the decorative first symbol C, the color of the decorative first symbol C seems to have transitioned to a part of the tiger character 767. Since the player can recognize the color, it is possible to produce an unexpected effect and improve the interest of the game.

The part displayed in the color of the tiger character 767 is not limited to the mode in which the color is displayed in the same color as the decorative first symbol C, but is displayed in the same color as the spark-shaped display 768 (for example, red). It may be an embodiment. Similarly, even in such an aspect, the player can recognize that the color of the spark-like display 768 has changed to a part of the tiger character 767, so that an unexpected effect can be produced and the interest of the game can be enjoyed. Can be improved.

On the other hand, the portion of the tiger character 767 that is not circled by the line (or 4) of FIG. 37 is maintained in monochrome display as in the case of FIG. 36 (or 3) of the first modification.

Therefore, after the collision effect occurs, only a part of the tiger character 767 displayed in monochrome (first effect mode) is displayed in a color similar to that of the decorative first symbol C (second effect mode). Since it is switched to, the reach production by SP2 reach can be made into a production that is unexpected for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. After that, the color display (second production mode) of the same color as the decoration first symbol C is switched so as to spread not only from a part of the tiger character 767 but also from a part of the tiger character 767 to the whole. You may.

Further, in this way, by switching the tiger character 767 to the color display of the same color as the decorative first symbol C, it becomes easier for the player to identify whether or not the symbol shifts to the probabilistic state after the big hit, and the player can visually recognize it. Since the character is improved, the interest of the game can be improved.

After that, the reach production develops from the SP2 reach to the SP3 reach, so that the player can raise the expectation for the big hit from the unexpected production, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Example of screen transition of battle production transition pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, an example of screen transition when the SP2 reach transitions to a battle effect, which is an effect in which characters fight each other, will be described.

FIG. 38 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of screen transitions when the reach effect becomes a battle effect and develops into SP3 reach during the variable display game.

FIG. 38 (ku) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the N reach of FIG. 34 (u) is developed, SP2 reach is started, and the battle effect is entered.

When the SP2 reach shifts to the battle production, for example, in the center of the display screen, the tiger character 767 is displayed in monochrome as the so-called hero character (friend character) on the left side, and the enemy on the right side so as to confront the tiger character 767. Character 769 is displayed in full color.

Even when the SP2 reach shifts to the battle effect, the decoration first symbol A of the left area 610A of the variable display area 610 and the decoration first symbol B of the right area 610B are the same as the above-mentioned SP2 reach reach effect. It is displayed small at the top ends of the screen. The first decorative symbols A and B are maintained in a temporarily stopped state (for example, temporarily stopped at "4"), and a blue color display is maintained.

FIG. 38 (K) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the battle effect of SP2 reach is more advanced than that of FIG. 38 (K).

As the SP2 reach battle effect progresses, the enemy character 769 moves to a position where it overlaps with the tiger character 767. By moving the enemy character 769 in this way, the player who is visually recognizing the display screen is told that the enemy character 769 approaches the tiger character 767 and attacks (melee attack). Can be recognized.

At that time, the enemy character 769 and the tiger character 767 can be emphasized so that the effect mode in which the enemy character 769 collides with the tiger character 767 can be emphasized in the same manner as the collision effect shown in FIG. A spark-like display 768 may be provided around it (eg, red spark).

FIG. 38 (ko) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the battle effect of SP2 reach is further advanced than that of FIG. 38 (ke).

For example, when the effect of the enemy character 769 attacking is completed, the enemy character 769 is hidden. At that time, if the tiger character 767 is able to prevent the attack from the enemy character 769, the tiger character 767 is switched from the monochrome display to the color display. That is, the display of the tiger character 767 shifts from a low-saturation state to a high-saturation state by performing the defense success effect.

Therefore, the player recognizes that the tiger character 767 has not been defeated by the enemy character 769, and can raise the expectation that the reach production will continue and the SP2 reach will further develop into the SP3 reach. Can improve the interest of.

Further, the battle effect can be continuously performed even in the SP3 reach, and for example, the effect that the tiger character 767 counterattacks the enemy character 769 can be performed. Then, when the tiger character 767 wins the enemy character 769, the result of the variable display game is set to a big hit (for example, "444"), and when the other cannot win, the result is shifted (for example, "454"). , The content of the production can be easily understood by the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

If the tiger character 767 cannot completely prevent the attack of the enemy character 769, the monochrome display of the tiger character 767 is maintained and the SP2 reach is terminated as it is. Good. In this way, by providing a simple reach effect in which the SP2 reach ends while the monochrome display of the tiger character 767 is maintained, the player can easily recognize that the result of the variable display game is out of order.

Further, even when the defense failure effect is performed, the SP3 reach effect may be developed by performing a revival effect such as standing up again after the monochrome display tiger character 767 is defeated. By providing such an effect, it is possible to perform an effect that is unexpected for the player who has recognized that the result of the variable display game is out of order, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, by switching the monochrome display tiger character 767 to color display when performing the revival production, it becomes easier for the player to understand that there is a possibility of reversal, and it is possible to fuel the player's expectation for a big hit. Because it can be done, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Variation example of screen transition of battle production transition pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a modified example of the screen transition when the SP2 reach transitions to the battle effect will be described.

FIG. 39 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is a modified example of the screen transition when the reach effect becomes a battle effect and develops into SP3 reach during the variable display game.

(K2) of FIG. 39 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the N reach of (U) of FIG. 34 is developed, SP2 reach is started, and the battle effect of the modified example is entered.

When the SP2 reach shifts to the battle effect of the modified example, for example, a cartoon frame 761 having a plurality of frame frames 762 (frames) having different shapes is displayed on the display screen, and the tiger character 767 is displayed in the frame frame 762. And the enemy character 769 are assigned to each other and are displayed so as to face each other.

At that time, in the frame frame 762 to which the tiger character 767 is assigned, all the objects (images, moving images, not shown) including the tiger character 767 are displayed in monochrome. On the other hand, in the frame frame 762 to which the enemy character 769 is assigned, all the objects including the enemy character are displayed in color. As described above, in the cartoon frame 761, only the predetermined frame frame 762 (with hatching) is displayed in color display. Therefore, since the frame frame 762 that the player wants to pay particular attention to can be emphasized by the color display, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

FIG. 39 (Ke 2) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the battle effect of the modified example of SP2 reach is more advanced than that of FIG. 39 (K2).

As the battle effect of the modified example of SP2 reach progresses, the color-displayed enemy character 769 moves into the frame frame 762 where the tiger character 767 is displayed, and attacks in close proximity to the tiger character 767. Attack production is executed. At that time, the enemy character 769 moves (enters) into the frame frame 762 in which the tiger character 767 is displayed, so that the objects in the frame frame 762 are colored except for the tiger character 767. It is displayed in the display. The monochrome display of the tiger character 767 is maintained.

FIG. 39 (2) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the battle effect of the modified example of SP2 reach is more advanced than that of FIG. 39 (Ke 2).

For example, if the attack effect of the enemy character 769 ends, the enemy character 769 is hidden, and the tiger character 767 is successfully defended, the tiger character 767 is displayed in color instead of monochrome display. Can be switched to.

Therefore, all the objects in the frame frame 762 in which the tiger character 767 is displayed are displayed in color including the tiger character 767. Further, for example, as shown in (2) of FIG. 39, the cartoon frame 761 may be displayed so as to open the next page, and the tiger character 767 may be displayed by transitioning from the lower frame to the upper frame frame 762. ..

By performing the reach effect using the cartoon frame 761 in this way, the reach effect can be made into a comical effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

After that, the effect control device 300 can continuously develop the reach effect from SP2 reach to SP3 reach in the same manner as in FIG. 38 (ko) described above.

The effect control device 300 can display the cartoon frame 761 so as to be located at the back (back surface, lower layer, lower layer) of the variable display area 610 in the display screen. That is, the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are displayed in front (front, upper layer, upper layer) in preference to the cartoon frame 761. Therefore, for example, as shown in (Ke 2) and (Ko 2) of FIG. 39, the decorative first symbols A and B (“4”) temporarily stopped in the variable display area 610 are displayed in front of the cartoon frame 761. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize which symbol is in the reach state, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the effect control device 300 may display the cartoon frame 761 so as to have transparency. By displaying in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (K2), even when the decorative first symbol B temporarily stopped in the variable display area 610 and the cartoon frame 761 overlap, the player can perform the display. Both the decoration first symbol B and the cartoon frame 761 can be recognized.

Further, in the modified example of this battle production, the battle production in which the tiger character 767 and the enemy character 769 fight in the cartoon frame 761 has been described, but instead of the enemy character 769, the above-mentioned (O) of FIG. 34 and the like have been described. The effect in which the decorative first symbol C collides with each other may be performed in the cartoon frame 761 as in the effect of collision. Even in such an aspect, a comical effect using the cartoon frame 761 can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Screen transition example of zone effect generation pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, an example of screen transition when a zone effect occurs during SP2 reach will be described.

FIG. 40 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of screen transitions when a zone effect is generated by a reach effect during a variable display game and develops into SP3 reach.

FIG. 40 (c) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the normal fluctuation of FIG. 34 (i) is in the reach state and reaches N reach, which is the same as that of FIG. 34 (c).

(E1) of FIG. 40 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the N reach of (U) of FIG. 40 is developed to the SP2 reach. Similar to (E) in FIG. 34, the decorative first symbol C moves from the right side of the display screen toward the monochrome display tiger character 767.

Further, in FIG. 40 (E1), an effect of displaying a special image 763 (a band indicated by a thin diagonal line, a moving image) of a dedicated background so as to surround the reach effect of the display screen occurs as a zone effect. As the special image 763 displayed in the zone effect, for example, an image related to the character "ZONE" that arouses the player's expectation for a big hit, the tiger character 767, and the like can be displayed.

Further, on the special image 763, for example, a character indicating the current gaming state (for example, "probability change state !!") is displayed together with or in place of the character "ZONE", and the player's expectation is felt. May be further increased.

The special image 763 displayed in FIG. 40 (E1) is displayed in monochrome, that is, in a state of low saturation (monochrome zone). The characters (for example, "ZONE") in the special image 763 may be displayed in color.

FIG. 40 (1) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the reach effect by SP2 reach is further advanced than that of FIG. 40 (E1). Similar to (O) in FIG. 34, the effect that the decorative first symbol C collides with the monochrome display tiger character 767 is performed. Further, the monochrome display of the special image 763 produced by the zone effect is maintained (monochrome zone).

FIG. 40 (or 5) is a display screen of the display device 41 after the reach effect by SP2 reach further progresses from FIG. 40 (1) and the effect of collision occurs. Similar to (ka) in FIG. 34, the tiger character 767 displayed in monochrome is switched to the color display after the collision effect.

Further, as shown in (or 5) of FIG. 40, the special image 763 (band shown by the coarse diagonal line) produced by the zone effect is also switched from the monochrome display to the color display when the tiger character 767 is switched to the color display (or 5). Color zone). Therefore, by visually recognizing the tiger character 767 that has shifted to a highly saturated state and the special image 763 produced by the zone effect, the player raises the expectation that the reach effect will continue and the SP2 reach will further develop into the SP3 reach. Because it can be done, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

After that, the reach effect develops into SP3 reach as shown by the arrow extending from (or 5) in FIG. 40. Therefore, it is possible to further arouse the high expectation of the player who is visually recognizing the reach effect that develops into SP3 reach, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Example of changes in the appearance of reach production]

In the description of the reach effect before developing into the SP3 reach, which has a high expectation of a big hit as described in FIG. 34, the effect control device 300 has a low saturation state (for example, monochrome display, a light color state) as a predetermined parameter. A predetermined part of the reach effect (for example, a tiger character 767, a predetermined image) was changed from to a high state (color display).

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 may change the saturation of a predetermined portion of the reach effect from a high state to a low state as a reach effect before developing into SP reach. According to such an aspect, it is possible to perform an unexpected production that develops into SP3 reach after the saturation becomes low, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the effect control device 300 may change the brightness and transparency of a predetermined portion of the reach effect. Even with such an aspect, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that it may develop into SP3 reach, as in the case of changing the saturation, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

For example, the effect control device 300 changes the brightness of the tiger character 767 from a dark state (for example, 0 is blackout) to a bright state (for example, 50 is normal display and 100 is whiteout) during the reach effect by SP2 reach. Can be made to.

Further, for example, the effect control device 300 changes the transparency of the tiger character 767 from a high state (for example, 100 is non-transparent, 50 is semi-transparent) to a low state (for example, 0 is non-transparent display (normal display)). You may.

The predetermined portion (target) for which the saturation or the like is changed during the reach effect may be an image object other than the tiger character 767. For example, the effect control device 300 may change the saturation of the enemy character 769, the background saturation of the reach effect, and the like.

[Example of changes in the appearance of identification information]
Next, an example of a change in the appearance of the identification information will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

As shown in FIG. 41, not only the predetermined portion (for example, the tiger character 767) excluding the identification information of the reach effect, but also the identification information (design, the first decoration in the present embodiment) temporarily stopped during the reach effect. For the symbols A and B), it is possible to change something other than saturation as a predetermined parameter.

FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in the appearance of identification information when a predetermined parameter is changed.

As shown in FIG. 41, the effect control device 300 reduces the thickness of the edge frame 764 of the identification information of the variable display area 610 from a thin state ((A) in FIG. 41) to a thick state (FIG. 41) as a predetermined parameter. (B)) can be changed. According to such an aspect, it is possible to produce an effect that is both surprising and promising for the player, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition to changing the thickness of the edge frame 764 of the identification information, the effect control device 300 increases the font of the identification information and changes the color of the background (white portion, shaded area) of the identification information. It may be changed. Even with such an aspect, it is possible to produce an effect that is both surprising and promising for the player, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the effect control device 300 may change the brightness and transparency of the identification information, the swing speed (cycle) and the swing width (strength) in the temporarily stopped state as predetermined parameters. Even with such an aspect, it is possible to produce an effect that is both surprising and promising for the player, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Action / effect of the first embodiment]
The game machine 10 of the first embodiment has a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (variable display game, special figure variable display game) and a game-related effect (for example, reach effect, zone effect). The effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the above is provided. In the game machine 10, the effect control means can execute the effect of the first effect mode (for example, in a state of low saturation) as the effect related to the game, and the first effect mode executed as the effect related to the game. It is possible to switch the effect of the above to the effect of the second effect mode (for example, in a state of high saturation) in which a predetermined parameter is different from that of the first effect mode.

According to such a game machine 10, by switching from the production of the first production mode to the production of the second production mode, it is possible to perform an unexpected production and a dynamic production mode when developing into SP3 reach. Can be emphasized by changing a predetermined parameter, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be fueled, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, by executing the effect of the first effect mode, the reach effect is overemphasized and becomes flashy, and the visibility of the identification information (decorative first symbols A to C, symbols, small symbols) in the display screen becomes visible. Since it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) makes the effect of the first effect mode (for example, a state of low saturation) a second effect mode (for example, a state of high saturation) in which a predetermined parameter is higher than that of the first effect mode. It is possible to switch to the production of. Even with such a game machine 10, it is possible to produce an unexpected effect and to arouse the player's expectation for a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) has a second effect mode (for example, Aya) at the end of the effect of the first effect mode (for example, in a state of low saturation) or after the effect of the first effect mode is completed. It is possible to start the production of a high degree). Even with such a game machine 10, it is possible to produce an unexpected effect and to arouse the player's expectation for a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) can start the effect of the second effect mode (for example, the state of high saturation) during the execution of the effect of the first effect mode (for example, the state of low saturation). According to such a game machine 10, it is possible to emphasize the effect mode of collision, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the reach effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute a monochrome effect without saturation (effect having zero saturation) as the effect of the first effect mode (for example, a state of low saturation), and the second effect. It is possible to produce a saturated color as an effect of an aspect (for example, a state of high saturation). Even with such a game machine 10, it is possible to produce an unexpected effect and to arouse the player's expectation for a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect in which a part of the effect is colored as the effect of the second effect mode (for example, in a state of high saturation). According to such a game machine 10, since the part of the effect that the player wants to pay particular attention to can be emphasized by the color display, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The game control means (game control device 100) can execute a variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which identification information (decorative first symbols A to C, symbols, small symbols) is variablely displayed as a game. In the effect control means (effect control device 300), during the execution of the effect of the first effect mode (for example, in a state of low saturation), at least a part of the identification information is subjected to the second effect with a predetermined parameter (for example, saturation). It can be displayed so as to be the same as the effect of the mode (for example, the state of high saturation). According to such a game machine 10, the visibility of the identification information is improved, and the identification information at the time of the reach production is easily seen by the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game control means (game control device 100) is a special game state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game (variable display game, special figure variable display game) is a special result (big hit result). Can occur. The effect control means (effect control device 300) has a second effect mode (for example, saturation) as an effect with a higher expectation that the result of the game will be a special result than the effect of the first effect mode (for example, a state of low saturation). Is high) production is possible. According to such a game machine 10, the player's expectation for a big hit can be fueled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Second Embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 54. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. In the first embodiment, when one event (predetermined event) occurs, a specific effect related to the one event is executed, information about the one event can be notified, and the interest of the game is improved.

〔Time chart〕
42 and 43 are time charts showing the generation timings of the predetermined effects A to D that occur as one event and the specific effects (related display, related effects) related to the respective predetermined effects A to D. In the present embodiment, the predetermined effect A is a zone effect, the predetermined effect B is a mission effect, the predetermined effect C is a pseudo continuous effect, and the predetermined effect D is a precursor effect of a pending change notice effect. The detailed aspects of each effect will be described later in FIGS. 44 to 48.

The volume and / or brightness level may be changed in connection with each predetermined effect A to D. Here, the level indicates the degree of the volume (loudness) of the speaker, or the degree of the brightness (brightness) of a predetermined LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46. The level may indicate the degree of brightness (brightness) of the screen of the display device 41. In the present embodiment, the speaker is either or both of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b. The predetermined LED is provided on a predetermined accessory such as the upper effect unit 40c, the side effect unit 40d, and the decorative devices 18a and 18b.

For convenience, the volume and / or brightness level will be described as having 6 levels of L0, L1, L2, L3, L4, and L5 (L0 <L1 <L2 <L3 <L4 <L5) from the smallest, but 6 levels. There may be other levels, and the volume and / or brightness may change continuously rather than stepwise. The levels L0, L1, L2, L3, L4, and L5 may be different for each of the predetermined effects A to D. The lowest level L0 may be zero or a value greater than zero.

Regarding the increase and decrease of the level in FIGS. 42 and 43, the level is gradually increased (fade in) or gradually decreased (fade out) instead of being rapidly or discontinuously increased or decreased. Good.

In the zone effect shown in the upper part of FIG. 42, the background displayed by the display device 41 is changed to a predetermined image (may be a moving image) by entering the zone. Then, the suggestion image 551 (for example, the character image "... via the zone" "... zone") suggesting that the zone effect has occurred, that is, the zone has been passed through, is subjected to the SP reach (for example) after the zone effect. It is displayed on the display device 41 in the specific reach effect (special reach). The display of the suggestion image 551 is the above-mentioned specific effect, and is a related display related to the executed zone effect or an explanatory display for explaining the executed zone effect. In addition, in SP reach, which tends to forget the effect that appeared before because the flashy effect is performed, the player can tell that the zone effect has occurred by displaying the related display related to the zone effect before the SP reach. I can remember.

In this embodiment, the zone effect is described as being performed in the first half of the reach before it develops into the SP reach. However, as shown by the dotted line, the zone effect may start from the normal fluctuation before the reach (that is, the first half fluctuation) or may be continued until the SP reach is developed. Further, the zone production may be continued even after the development to SP reach. The effect control device 300 can set the zone effect, for example, in step B2009 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 31).

When SP reach is selected by lottery (distribution) as a variable pattern, the same effect as N reach (first reach effect, predetermined reach effect) is executed in the first half of the reach, and then SP reach is performed in the second half of the reach. The production peculiar to SP reach (second reach production, SP reach production) is executed. When N reach is selected as a variation pattern by lottery, there is no effect in the latter half of the reach, and the effect ends in the first half of the reach and does not develop into SP reach. The effect control device 300 can set the content of the reach effect, for example, in step B2010 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 31).

In this embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, it is assumed that there is one type of SP reach. However, as described in the first embodiment, there may be a plurality of types of SP reach (special reach) such as SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach, and SP1 reach → SP2 reach → SP3 reach in stages. It is also possible to develop in the order of SP1 reach → SP3 reach, or in the order of SP2 reach → SP3 reach without SP1 reach. In this case, SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach may be collectively referred to as SP reach.

In the present embodiment, the related display of the zone effect that has been executed (suggestion image 551 via the zone) is described as being executed immediately in the latter half of the reach after the development of the SP reach. However, as shown by the dotted line, the related display of the zone effect may be executed some time after the development of SP reach. Further, the related display of the zone effect may be executed immediately after the end of the zone effect, even in the first half of the reach. The effect control device 300 can set the related display of the zone effect, for example, in step B2009 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 31).

In addition, the related display of the executed zone effect can be executed at a plurality of timings, and not only during the change of the special figure change display game (before the derivation of the stop symbol) but also after the change of the special figure change display game ends (stop). After the symbol is derived), it may be displayed during the stop display time of the stop symbol, during the fanfare after the jackpot result is derived, during the jackpot round, and during the jackpot ending. In this case, the effect control device 300 can set the related display of the zone effect, for example, in step B2012 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 31) or steps B2102, B2105, B2111 of the hit system command process (FIG. 32). In particular, the association display may be performed during both the period from the start of the second half of the reach to the end of the fluctuation and the period from the end of the fluctuation to the end of the fanfare.

In the case of a jackpot result where the jackpot stop symbol is displayed, there are a jackpot stop symbol stop display, a jackpot fanfare, a jackpot round, and a jackpot ending, and a zone effect after the jackpot result is derived (after the jackpot stop symbol is displayed). By the related display of, it is possible to impress the player that the big hit has been made via the zone. On the other hand, in the case of the out-of-order result in which the out-of-order stop symbol is derived, there is no big-hit fanfare, big-hit round, or big-hit ending that constitutes the big hit state (special game state), and the zone is in the stop display time of the out-of-order stop symbol. The related display of the production encourages the player to guess the degree of expectation of the zone production.

The related display, which is information related to the zone effect, can be displayed in a predetermined period (for example, the period from the start of the latter half of the reach to the end of the fanfare) before and after deriving the result (stop symbol) of the special figure variation display game. As a result, it is possible to strongly impress the player that the jackpot has been achieved via the zone.

As will be described later, an image corresponding to the number of games of the special figure variation display game from the end of the previous jackpot (or power-on) may be displayed during the fanfare.

In connection with the zone effect, the volume and / or brightness level may be changed as an effect parameter. The volume and / or brightness level may be raised from the lowest level L0 to level L4 when performing a flashy and conspicuous effect in the zone effect, and the volume and / or brightness level when no flashy effect is performed. May be raised from the lowest level L0 to level L1. After the zone effect, the level is lowered to, for example, the lowest level L0.

The level L4 is larger than the level L2 at the end of the fluctuation (when the symbol is stopped) and the average level L3 during the big hit (during the special game state), and the level L1 is smaller than the level L2 and the level L3. If it is a volume level, level L2 is, for example, the volume level of the stop sound when the symbol is stopped due to the end of fluctuation, and level L3 is, for example, the average BGM (background music, music) during a big hit. Volume level. Further, in FIG. 42, the volume level during the zone production may be the volume level of the BGM generated during the zone production. If the BGM has a level higher than the volume level of the stop sound, there is a high possibility that the player will strongly recognize it.

While displaying the related display of the zone effect, the level may be raised from the lowest level L0 to the level L2. Not limited to this, the level may be made higher than the level L2 and the level L3 in order to impress the related display. Further, the volume level during the display of the related display may be the volume level of the BGM generated during the display of the related display.

If the level during the zone production is set to level L1 and the level displayed in the related display after that is set to level L2, the level gradually rises to the level L3 during the big hit, and the big hit production can be excited. .. Volume and brightness are examples of production parameters, and the levels of other production parameters such as sound wavelength (pitch) and light wavelength (light color) are gradually increased toward the jackpot. Good.

In the mission effect shown in the lower part of FIG. 42, by entering the mission mode, the content of a predetermined mission on the effect is displayed on the display device 41 in character display (for example, character image “4 to reach”). Then, when the mission is achieved as one event, that is, when the reach with the symbol "4" occurs, the mission is completed (the reach with the symbol "4" has occurred). The suggestion suggestion image 507 (for example, the character image "mission achievement") is displayed on the display device 41 after the end of the mission mode. The display of the suggestion image 507 also suggests a mission mode (mission effect, predetermined effect B) that has occurred as one event, and is also a related display (specific effect) related to this.

In the present embodiment, the mission effect is described as being executed with the normal fluctuation (first half fluctuation) before the reach. The effect control device 300 can set the mission effect, for example, in step B2006 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 31). The mission effect may be executed after the reach. The content of the mission in this case is, for example, development into SP reach.

In the present embodiment, the related display of the executed mission effect is described as being continuously executed from immediately after the end of the mission effect (mission mode) to the end of the variation of the special figure variation display game. However, as shown by the dotted line, the related display of the mission effect may be interrupted by another display such as a movie display on the display device 41. The effect control device 300 can set the related display of the mission effect, for example, in step B2009 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 31).

In addition, the related display of the executed mission effect can be executed at a plurality of timings, and not only during the change of the special figure change display game (before derivation of the stop symbol) but also after the change of the special figure change display game ends (stop). After the symbol is derived), it may be displayed during the stop display time of the stopped symbol, during the fanfare after the jackpot result is derived, during the jackpot round, or during the jackpot ending. In this case, the effect control device 300 can set the related display of the mission effect, for example, in step B2012 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 31) or steps B2102, B2105, B2111 of the hit system command process (FIG. 32).

In the case of a jackpot result where the jackpot stop symbol is displayed, there are a jackpot stop symbol stop display, a jackpot fanfare, a jackpot round, and a jackpot ending. It is possible to impress the player that he has become a big hit via the game. On the other hand, in the case of the out-of-order result in which the out-of-order stop symbol is derived, it is urged that the player infers the expectation of the mission effect by displaying the related display of the mission effect during the stop display time of the out-of-order stop symbol. Is done.

The related display, which is information related to the mission effect, can be displayed in a predetermined period (for example, the period from the start of the latter half of the reach to the end of the fanfare) before and after deriving the result (stop symbol) of the special figure variation display game. This makes it possible to strongly impress the player that he has completed the mission and became a big hit. The display time (effect time) of the related display of the mission effect may be different from the display time of the related display of the zone effect.

In relation to the mission effect (mission mode), the volume and / or brightness level may be changed as an effect parameter. In the mission effect, the volume and / or brightness level may be raised from the lowest level L0 to the level L2. The level L2 is smaller than the average level L3 during the big hit (during the special gaming state), and if it is a volume level, it is equivalent to the stop sound. Further, in FIG. 42, the volume level during the mission production (during the mission mode) may be the volume level of the BGM generated during the mission production.

When the mission is completed, the display device 41 starts displaying the mission achievement suggestion image 507 as a related display, and the volume and / or brightness level is raised from level L2 to level L5 for a short period in a spike shape. After that, it may be lowered to level L1. Here, in terms of volume, level L5 corresponds to generating a special sound, and level L1 corresponds to the volume level of BGM. In this way, by making the level higher than the average level L3 during the jackpot for a short period of time during fluctuations and making the other levels smaller than the level L3, it is possible to strongly notify the player that the mission has been completed. It can also save electricity. Volume and brightness are examples of production parameters, and the levels of other production parameters such as sound wavelength (pitch) and light wavelength (light color) are spiked when the mission is completed. It may be increased or decreased by raising or lowering it for a short period of time.

It should be noted that the level during the mission production may be made higher than the level L2 and the level L3, and a unique BGM (musical piece) may be output from the speaker to emphasize that the mission is being produced. Similarly, the displayed level of the related display can be set to level L2 or level 3 or higher.

Further, as described later, during the fanfare, the sound corresponding to the expected degree of reach generated may be generated from the speaker, but at this time, the volume level is higher than the average level L3 during the big hit. Become.

In the pseudo continuous effect shown in the upper part of FIG. 43, in one special figure variation display game, a pseudo variation for varying and temporarily stopping the decorative special symbol (identification information) is performed a predetermined number of times. The effect control device 300 displays a special image (here, the character image “NEXT”) on the display device 41 when the decorative special symbol is temporarily stopped as a part of the pseudo continuous effect. The special image may be included in a pseudo-continuous symbol that suggests a pseudo-continuous effect (next pseudo-variation) as a kind of decorative special symbol.

The effect control device 300 displays a special image (character image "NEXT") on the display device 41 at the time of temporarily stopping the decorative special symbol, and then displays the special image or is related to the temporary stop display of the decorative special symbol. As a display (specific effect), the number of times of the started pseudo-variation is displayed on the display device 41. The number of pseudo-variations that have started is displayed as a character image such as "x2" or "x3".

In the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect is described as being executed with the normal variation (first half variation) before the reach. The effect control device 300 can set a pseudo continuous effect as a part of the variation effect, for example, in step B2010 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 31).

In the present embodiment, the number of pseudo-variations (“× 2”, “× 3”, etc.), which is a related display related to the executed pseudo-continuous effect (particularly the display of a special image), is provisionally displayed from the start of each pseudo-variation. It is executed until the suspension or SP reach development. The related display is intermittently displayed on the display device 41 from the SP reach development to the stop symbol display so as not to interfere with other effects such as a movie effect and a cut-in notice. For example, in step B2010 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 31), the effect control device 300 can set the number of pseudo-variations display as the related display.

In addition, the related display related to the executed pseudo continuous effect, especially the final display of the number of pseudo fluctuations (here, "x3") can be executed at a plurality of timings, and the special figure variation display game is changing. Not only that, after the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol variation display game (after the stop symbol is derived), it may be displayed during the stop display time of the stop symbol, during the fanfare, during the jackpot round, and during the jackpot ending. In this case, the effect control device 300 can set the related display in step B2012 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 31) or steps B2102, B2105, B2111 of the hit system command process (FIG. 32), for example.

In the case of a jackpot result in which a jackpot stop symbol is displayed, there are a jackpot stop symbol stop display, a jackpot fanfare, a jackpot round, and a jackpot ending. It is possible to impress the player that he has become a big hit through the production. In particular, if this association display suggests a pseudo-ream number, which is the final number of pseudo-variations, the player can associate the pseudo-ream number with the occurrence of a jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of an out-of-order result in which the out-of-order stop symbol is derived, the player estimates the degree of expectation of the pseudo-continuous effect by displaying the pseudo-continuous effect during the stop display time of the out-of-order stop symbol. Is prompted.

The related display related to the number of pseudo-reams can be displayed in a predetermined period (for example, the period from the start of the latter half of the reach to the end of the fanfare) before and after deriving the result (stop symbol) of the special figure variation display game. As a result, the player can be strongly impressed with the number of pseudo-reams that became a big hit.

In connection with the pseudo-continuous effect, the volume and / or brightness level may be changed as an effect parameter. When displaying a special image (“NEXT”), that is, when temporarily stopping a decorative special symbol, the volume and / or brightness level may be raised from the lowest level L0 to level L4. Subsequently, when the pseudo-variation number display "x2" is displayed as the related display related to the pseudo continuous effect, the level is greatly lowered from the level L4 to the level L2. Level L4 is larger than the average level L3 in the jackpot, and level L2 is smaller than level L3. In this way, when displaying a special image (“NEXT”) and when displaying the number of pseudo fluctuations, sounds of different modes (volume) are generated from the speaker (sound generating means), or in different modes (luminance). By generating light from a predetermined LED (light emitting means), it is possible to strongly notify the appearance of a special image (“NEXT”) or the number display of pseudo fluctuations, and the interest of the game is improved. The volume and brightness are examples of production parameters, and other production parameters such as sound wavelength (sound pitch) and light wavelength (light color) are also used when displaying a special image (“NEXT”). And when displaying the number of pseudo-variations, different modes may be used.

Here, if it is a volume level, level L4 corresponds to generating a special sound (for example, "NEXT") or a sound effect when displaying a special image ("NEXT"), and is a level. L2 corresponds to the volume level of the BGM during the display of the number of pseudo fluctuations. Further, while displaying the number of pseudo-variations (“x2”), the level may be raised from level L4 to level L5 to emphasize that the number of pseudo-variations has increased.

Similarly, in displaying the next special image (“NEXT”), the volume and / or luminance level may be raised from level L2 to level L4. Subsequently, when the number of pseudo fluctuations (“x3”) is displayed as the related display related to the pseudo continuous effect, the level is lowered from level L4 to level L2. On the contrary, while displaying the number of pseudo-variations (“x3”), the level may be raised from level L4 to level L5 to emphasize that the number of pseudo-variations has increased. Further, when the related display (“× 3”) is intermittently displayed on the display device 41 during SP reach, the volume and / or brightness level is changed from the lowest level L0 to the level L2 (this) in correspondence with the intermittent display. (Not limited to).

When the volume level of the sound generated when the special image (“NEXT”) and the number of pseudo fluctuations are displayed (for example, “× 2” and “× 3”) is the level L2 or higher of the stop sound generated when the symbol is stopped. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to recognize these sounds.

The pending change notice effect shown in the lower part of FIG. 43 is based on the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) and the pre-reading variation system command (pre-reading variation pattern command) as the determination result of the game control device 100 (pre-determination means). Therefore, the display mode of the hold display (starting memory display) is changed in the display device 41. As described above, the game control device 100 can predetermine the result of the special figure variation display game related to the start memory before the special figure variation display game based on the start memory is executed. In the present embodiment, the hold change notice effect is executed for the hold display 633a of the start memory (hold during change) during execution (during change) of the special figure change display game, but the special figure change display game. May be executed for the hold display 633 of the start memory before the execution of.

Prior to the hold change notice effect, the effect control device 300 executes a precursor effect, which is a precursor of the hold change notice effect, on the display device 41. For example, the precursor effect is an effect in which a predetermined character appears and operates on the display device 41 to act on a hold display scheduled to change its mode.

In the first half of the reach, a character appears and operates as a precursor effect. After that, as a hold change notice effect, the change hold display 633a, which is the hold display of the change hold, changes from green to red. The degree of expectation that the special figure variation display game related to the hold display will be a big hit is red> green> blue> white in descending order (largest order) with respect to the color of the hold display. The change in the display mode of the hold display may be a change in shape instead of color. After that, a character image (for example, "red hold") indicating that the hold display has changed to red is displayed on the display device 41. The hold change notice effect (hold change of the hold display) and this character image are related effects (specific effect) related to the precursor effect.

In the present embodiment, the hold change notice effect and the display of the character image (for example, "red hold") are described as being executed in the first half of the reach. However, the pending change notice effect may be executed in the normal fluctuation (first half fluctuation) before the reach or in the latter half of the reach. The effect control device 300 is, for example, in step B1717 of the look-ahead variation command process (FIG. 28) or B2015 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 31), as a part of the look-ahead effect when the number of holds is reduced (at the time of hold shift). Hold on hold during change You can set the change notice effect and the display of text images.

In the present embodiment, as a related display (specific effect) related to the already executed precursor effect or the pending change notice effect, the display of the character image related to the pending change can be executed at a plurality of timings, and the special figure variation display game can be displayed. Not only during the fluctuation, but also after the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation display game ends (after the stop symbol is derived), the stop symbol may be displayed during the stop display time, during the jackpot fanfare, during the jackpot round, and during the jackpot ending. In this case, the effect control device 300 can set the related display in step B2012 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 31) or steps B2102, B2105, B2111 of the hit system command process (FIG. 32), for example.

In the case of a jackpot result in which a jackpot stop symbol is displayed, there are a jackpot stop symbol stop display, a jackpot fanfare, a jackpot round, and a jackpot ending. It is possible to impress the player that the big hit has been achieved through the production and the pending change notice production. On the other hand, in the case of the out-of-order result in which the out-of-order stop symbol is derived, the character image related to the hold change is displayed during the stop display time of the out-of-order stop symbol, and the player estimates the expectation of the hold change notice effect. You are prompted to do it.

Here, in addition to "Big hit with red hold", if the ending of the big hit is in progress, the display of the character image is displayed as "2000 cars (pieces) with red hold" in association with the number of prize balls won by the big hit. May be done.

The related display can be displayed in a predetermined period (for example, the period from the start of the latter half of the reach to the end of the fanfare) before and after deriving the result (stop symbol) of the special figure variation display game. As a result, it is possible to strongly impress the player that a big hit has been achieved by a predetermined hold change notice (for example, change to red hold).

The volume and / or brightness level may be changed according to the pending change notice effect and its precursor effect. In the precursor effect (for example, the appearance and operation of a character), the volume and / or brightness level may be raised from the lowest level L0 to the level L2. Subsequently, at the time of the hold change notice effect, the level is greatly raised from level L2 to level L4 to make the hold change notice effect stand out. Level L4 is larger than the average level L3 in the jackpot, and level L2 is smaller than level L3. On the contrary, the level of the precursor effect may be set to level L4, the level of the hold change advance notice effect may be set to level L2, and the precursor effect may be conspicuous.

In this way, between the precursor effect and the subsequent pending change advance notice effect, sound in a different mode (volume) is generated from the speaker (sound generating means), or light is emitted in a different mode (luminance) by a predetermined LED (light emitting means). ), It is possible to strongly notify the appearance of the pending change notice effect or the precursor effect, and the interest of the game is improved. Volume and brightness are examples of production parameters, and other production parameters such as sound wavelength (pitch) and light wavelength (light color) are also the precursor production and the subsequent pending change notice production. They may be in different modes. For example, in the case of the hold change notice effect, the color of the light from the predetermined LED may be matched with the color of the changing hold display 633a, and the color of the precursor effect may be changed from green to red after the hold change.

Following the hold change notice effect, a character image (for example, "red hold"), which is a related display (specific effect) related to the precursor effect and the hold change notice effect, is displayed. The volume and / or luminance level, which has dropped to the lowest level L0 after the end of, may rise to level L4 again. By repeatedly reaching the level L4, it is possible to impress that the change has been suspended. Although the level at the time of displaying the character image is higher than the level L3, it may be lower than the level L3.

Here, as for the volume level, the level L2 of the precursor effect may be the volume level of the dialogue sound of the character, and the level L4 of the hold change advance notice effect is the volume of the hold change sound generated at the time of the hold change. The level may be sufficient, and the level L4 when displaying a character image (for example, "red hold") may be the sound volume level of the dialogue (for example, "red hold"). Since the volume level of the sound generated during the precursor effect, the pending change notice effect, and the subsequent display of the character image is equal to or higher than the level of the stop sound generated when the symbol is stopped, these sounds are generated for a short time by the player. Even if you do, you can make it well recognized.

In FIGS. 42 and 43 above, the related display (specific effect) related to the executed effect (one event that has occurred) is the zone effect, the pseudo continuous effect, the mission effect, the precursor effect before the pending change, and the like. It may be executed at a plurality of timings according to the content or type of the completed production. As a result, the variety of production becomes abundant and the interest of the game is improved. For example, in the pseudo-continuous production, the related display is displayed multiple times in the intermittent display before the stop symbol is derived, and the related display is not displayed after the stop symbol is derived (after the jackpot result is derived), but in the mission production and the zone production, the jackpot is displayed. There are many variations, such as displaying the related display multiple times, both before and after the derivation of the stop symbol. Further, for example, there is a variation in which a plurality of timings of the related display are changed according to the number of pseudo-reams (the number of final pseudo-variations) of the pseudo-continuous effect.

[Screen transition diagram]
44A to 44D are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order with respect to the second embodiment. 44A to 44D show a case where the predetermined effects A to D of FIGS. 42 and 43 and the related effects (related display, specific effect) related thereto are executed in duplicate. Since each of the predetermined effects A to D is selected by lottery, it is possible that they are executed independently, or that any two or three of them may overlap, if not all of them.

When the predetermined effects A to D of FIGS. 42 and 43 overlap, the volume level of the speaker and / or the brightness level of the predetermined LED is the sum of the levels of the respective effects. It may be a level, but if the total level exceeds the maximum volume and / or brightness, it remains at the maximum level (for example, 2 × L4, etc.). With the total level, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation due to overlapping productions.

However, when the BGM of each effect overlaps, in order to avoid confusion, the BGM of the effect generated later is given priority (selected) and output from the speaker. However, not limited to this, when the BGM of each production overlaps, any one BGM related to the predetermined production or the related production (related display, specific production) having the highest expectation of big hit is selected. It may be output at the total volume level of each BGM or the original volume level of the selected BGM. Further, when the BGMs of the respective effects overlap, any one BGM related to the predetermined effect having the highest volume level or the related effect (related display, specific effect) may be selected. In order to make it easier for the player to grasp the degree of expectation, it is possible to set the volume level of the BGM of each effect to a large value according to the degree of expectation of each effect.

(A) of FIG. 44A is a display screen when starting a decorative special figure variation display game in a normal game state. In the first hold display unit 630a that displays the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) as the first hold display, the hold display 633 (first hold display) moves to the right (hold shift), and the square frame is held. The rightmost hold display 633 of the first hold display unit 630a moves to the digestion area 640. At present, the hold display 633 is not displayed on the second hold display unit 630b that displays the second start memory (special FIG. 2 start memory) as the second hold display (second start memory display). In the decorative special figure variation display game started here, a pseudo continuous effect including pseudo variation of a predetermined number of times (three times) is executed.

After that, in (a), the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610 as the identification information, and the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) is executed as the identification information. ↓) is being executed in the variable display area 615. In the left region 610A, right region 610B, and middle region 610C of the variable display area 610, the left symbol (decorative first symbol A), the right symbol (decorative first symbol B), and the middle symbol (decorative first symbol C) are respectively. It is fluctuating. Each decorative special symbol (left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) is composed of a square frame (frame image) and a number (numerical image), but may be a character (character image) instead of the square frame. Within the frame, the color of the numbers is different from the color of the parts other than the numbers. Also, in (a), each decorative special symbol is fluctuating at a high moving speed (during high-speed fluctuating), but the frame image (or character image) is hidden (deleted) and only the numbers fluctuate. You can. In addition, each decorative special symbol may be displayed semi-transparently and lightly during high-speed fluctuation.

Further, in (a), the variable hold display 633a indicating the variable hold (starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure variable display game) related to the special figure variable display game being executed is the reserved digestion area 640. It is displayed in. As a look-ahead effect at the time of the hold shift, the hold display 633 changes from the normal mode (white) to the suggestion mode (green) indicating that the expectation of the big hit is higher than usual, and becomes the changing hold display 633a. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 are respectively designated with the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number. The indicated number "0" is displayed.

Next, in (c), the mission mode is entered as a mission effect, and the character display 501 (character image) of "mission mode entry" and the content of the predetermined mission of reaching with the symbol 4 are shown in "4". The character display 502 (character image) saying "Let's reach" is displayed. During the mission mode, the BGM (BGM-b) related to the mission mode and its related display may be output from the speaker at a volume of level L2. Further, the LED (predetermined LED) of the predetermined accessory may emit light at the brightness of level L2.

Subsequently, in (d), the first pseudo-variation (single effect) of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed, and the left symbol "2" and the right symbol "5" are temporarily stopped and displayed with different symbols (shaking fluctuation). In the middle region 610C, a pseudo-continuous symbol 504 suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect is displayed as a stop display or a temporary stop display. A special image (character image "NEXT") is included in the pseudo-continuous pattern 504 and displayed. The special image may be the pseudo-continuous symbol 504 itself. Further, in (d), a special voice "next" is output from the speaker at the volume level L4, and a predetermined LED emits light at the brightness level L4. Further, when the character display 502 interferes with the left symbol, the right symbol, or the pseudo-continuous symbol 504, the character display 502 may be moved downward from the state displayed in the center of the screen of (c) and displayed in a different mode. ..

Next, in (e), the second pseudo-variation has started. In addition, the number of pseudo fluctuations displayed 505 (“x2”) is displayed as a related display related to the executed pseudo continuous effect (display of the special image “NEXT” or temporary stop display of the left and right symbols). The number display 505 (“x2”) is information about the pseudo continuous effect that has been executed. Further, the sound "double" is output from the speaker at the volume level L2, and the predetermined LED emits light at the brightness level L2. After that, the BGM (BGM-b) related to the mission effect and its related display is switched, and the BGM (BGM-c) related to the pseudo continuous effect and its related display is output from the speaker at the volume level L2. As described above, the BGM related to the effect having the highest expectation of the jackpot or the volume level (for example, the mission effect) is selected, and the total volume level is the sum of the volume levels of the BGM related to each effect, or selected. The original volume level of BGM may be output from the speaker.

After that, in (f), the second pseudo-variation (single effect) of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed, and the left symbol "3" and the right symbol "6" are temporarily stopped and displayed with different symbols (shaking fluctuation is performed). ), In the middle region 610C, a pseudo-continuous symbol 504 suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect is displayed as a stop display or a temporary stop display. Similar to (d), a special image (character image "NEXT") is included in the pseudo-continuous symbol 504 and displayed. The special image may be the pseudo-continuous symbol 504 itself. In (f), a special voice "next" is output from the speaker at the volume level L4.

Next, in (g), the third pseudo-variation has started. Further, as in (e), the number of pseudo fluctuations 505 (“× 3”) is displayed as a related display related to the executed pseudo continuous effect (display of the special image “NEXT” or temporary stop display of the left and right symbols). Is displayed. The number display 505 (“x3”) is information about the pseudo continuous effect that has been executed. Further, the sound "triple" is output from the speaker at the volume level L2. After that, the BGM (BGM-c) related to the pseudo continuous effect and its related display is output from the speaker again at the volume level L2.

The number display 505 of pseudo-variations (“× 2” and “× 3”) is displayed in a display mode (color and shape) according to the degree of expectation (expectation of the variation) that will be a big hit in the special figure variation display game being executed. And the effect that accompanies the number display) may be different. That is, the number display 505 may suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by changing the display mode. On the other hand, the special images "NEXT" of (d) and (f) may have the same display mode even if the number of pseudo fluctuations increases. By displaying the special image "NEXT" in a fixed display mode in this way, the player can easily recognize that it is a pseudo continuous effect.

In addition, the number display 505 (here, "x2") other than the final number of pseudo fluctuations (pseudo-ream count) is not only the expected degree of the fluctuation but also the expected degree of another pseudo fluctuation (the degree of expectation that there is another pseudo fluctuation). The display mode may be different depending on the pseudo-continuous execution expectation degree and the pseudo-continuous continuation expectation degree). When the special image "NEXT" has a fixed display mode as described above, by changing the display mode of the number display 505 (here, "x2"), the variation of the production can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved. For example, if the default number display 505 of "x2" is green and the default number display 505 of "x3" is red, "x3" is displayed when "x2" is displayed in red. Suggest that. That is, the color of "x2" corresponds to the degree of expectation that "x3" is displayed. As described above, the previous number display 505 "x2" becomes the default color of the next number display 505 "x3", which suggests that the next number display 505 is displayed.

The special image "NEXT" may have a plurality of display modes instead of the fixed display mode as described above. For example, in order to increase the variation of the production and improve the interest of the game, the display mode (color, shape, effect associated with the number of times display, etc.) of the special image "NEXT" may be different depending on the expectation of the big hit. .. That is, the special image "NEXT" may suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by changing the display mode. Further, for example, the special image "NEXT" may have a different display mode depending on the effect before being displayed so as to have a relationship with the previous effect. By doing so, it is possible to execute a highly relevant production in three stages of the previous production, the special image "NEXT", and the number display of pseudo fluctuations 505 ("x2" and "x3"). You can improve the interest of the game.

Further, the display of the special image "NEXT" in (f) is omitted, the number display 505 of "x2" in (e) is displayed, and then the number display 505 of "x3" is displayed immediately after shifting to (g). Can also be displayed. In this case, it is possible to execute the pseudo-ream number 3 times with the same fluctuation time value (addition value of A4606) as in the case where the pseudo-ream number is 2. As a result, it is not necessary to set a large number of variable time values, the capacity of the game control program is reduced, and it becomes difficult to grasp the number of pseudo-reams from the variable time values (because it cannot be grasped early). Can be improved.

After that, in (c), the left symbol and the right symbol, which are in the reach state and the N reach (first half of the reach) is started, are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol "4", and the shaking is changed. The left and right symbols can be configured to stop completely. Since the pseudo continuous effect has been completed, the pseudo continuous pattern is not displayed. Since the production mission of reaching with symbol 4 has been achieved, the suggestion image 507 suggesting that the mission has been achieved is related to the achievement of the mission (one event) or the mission production (mission mode). It is displayed on the display screen as a related display (information). The suggestion image 507 includes the character image "mission achievement" arranged diagonally in the strip-shaped frame, and corresponds to the occurrence of the reach in the symbol 4. The suggestion image 507 may include not only a character image but also an oblique band-shaped frame. The size of the pseudo-variation number display 505 (“x3”) may be changed to a smaller size and the display position may be moved so as not to interfere with the swaying fluctuations of the left symbol “4” and the right symbol “4”. ..

Further, in (c), the voice "reach" and the voice "mission achievement" are sequentially output from the speaker at the volume level L5, and the predetermined LED emits light at the brightness level L5. After that, in response to the maintenance of the mission achievement suggestion image 507 (related display), the BGM (BGM-b) related to the mission mode related display is output from the speaker at level L1, and the predetermined LED is the brightness level. It may emit light at L1. The voice "reach" may have a volume level different from that of the voice "mission achievement". Further, instead of the voice "mission achievement", a predetermined sound effect or the like may be generated.

In addition, the number "4" in the above-mentioned character display 502 "Reach with 4" from (c) to (ki) is not mistaken for a special decorative symbol, so that the left symbol "4" and the right symbol "4" are not mistaken. The font and size are different from. Further, while the character display 502 is completely stopped so as not to be mistaken for a special decorative symbol, the left symbol "4" and the right symbol "4" are swaying and fluctuating.

Also, in (c), the character display 502 "Reach with 4" may overlap with the special decorative design that is difficult to see due to the high-speed fluctuations of (c), (e), and (ki), but (d) (f). ) Does not overlap with the special decorative design that is easy to see in the temporarily stopped state. The character display 502 "Reach with 4" may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the special decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped even in (c), (e), and (g) from the beginning. Furthermore, the character display 502 may be displayed at the same position or in the same manner as the mission achievement suggestion image 507 (described later), or may be displayed at a position within the diagonal band-shaped frame or in a diagonal band-shaped manner. ..

Subsequently, in (ke), in the first half of the reach before developing into SP reach, a character display 550 (character image) indicating that the player enters a predetermined zone (Tora zone) is displayed by the character "Tora zone entry". .. The BGM (BGM-b) related to the related display (suggested image 507) of the mission mode is switched, and the BGM (BGM-a) related to the zone effect and the related display is output at the volume level L4.

Then, in (ko), as shown by diagonal lines along the square edge of the screen, a predetermined zone (Tora zone) in which the background image (background moving image) changes to a predetermined image (predetermined moving image) peculiar to the zone. ). At this stage, the suggestion image 551 (character image "Tora zone"), which will be described later, may already be displayed. Further, here, as a precursory effect, a tiger character 556 corresponding to a predetermined zone appears on the display screen and acts on the variable pending display 633a as if piercing with a spear. Then, in response to the precursory effect, the piercing sound "gussatsu" is output from the speaker at the volume level L2.

Next, in (sa), the changing hold display 633a changes from green to red as a hold change notice effect which is a related display (specific effect) related to the precursor effect. It should be noted that the holding change display 633a may pop out from the digestion holding area 640 when the holding change occurs. The hold change notice effect and the precursor effect thereof may be executed on the hold display 633 before the start of the fluctuation in the first hold display unit 630a and the second hold display unit 630b as the standby hold area. Further, the hold change sound "Dokhan", which is a sound effect corresponding to the hold change notice effect, is output from the speaker at the volume level L4. Even if there is a precursory effect, it is a ghost effect, and the pending change notice effect may not be executed.

After that, in (shi), as a related display (specific effect), the character image 558 (“red hold”) indicating that the hold display has changed to red on the display screen is the tiger character 557 corresponding to the predetermined zone. It is displayed as a line of. The character image 558 serves as information regarding the pending change notice effect. The tiger character 557 may correspond to a part (head) of the tiger character 556 (ko). In addition to displaying the character image 558, the dialogue voice "Red hold" is output from the speaker at the volume level L4.

Next, in (s), the predetermined zone (Tora zone) ends, and the background image returns to the image before changing from the predetermined image to the predetermined image.

After that, in (C), N reach (first half of reach) developed, and the left symbol "4" and right symbol "4", which became smaller in size, moved to the upper left and right corners of the display screen, and SP reach (reach). The second half). The left symbol "4" and the right symbol "4" continue to temporarily stop (sway fluctuation). In the SP reach, the battle effect between the ally character 560a and the enemy character 560b is executed as a movie 565 (movie). Before the battle production, first, the expectation degree display 561 is displayed together with the ally character 560a and the enemy character 560b. In the expectation degree display 561, the expectation degree that becomes a big hit of SP reach is displayed as the ratio (number) of the ★ mark to the whole star mark (★ ☆) as the ratio that the ally character 560a wins.

In FIG. 44 (C), a square frame image (character image may be used) of each decorative special symbol (left symbol "4", right symbol "4") moved to the moving position in the upper corner of the display screen. Is continuously displayed from the N reach of (h) before the start of movement. Therefore, compared to the following cases where the display is hidden at the stage (C), unnecessary processing (effect) is not executed, so that the processing load can be reduced, and each moved decorative special symbol is temporarily stopped with respect to reach. It is easy to recognize that it is a reach pattern.

However, the frame image (which may be a character image) is hidden (deleted) before the movement of each special decoration symbol (left symbol, right symbol) is started or before the movement is completed, and each decoration special symbol after the movement is special. The symbols (left symbol, right symbol) may be composed only of numbers. As a result, it is possible to prevent the frame image from interfering with other effects such as SP reach effect (competition effect).

Further, each decorative special pattern after movement may be a number (number image) with another image such as an effect image added instead of the frame image so as not to interfere with other effects. Another image such as an effect image can suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit (the degree of expectation of success of SP reach) depending on the display mode such as color and shape, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

As will be described later, in the configuration in which the frame image of the special decorative symbol is hidden or deleted before (hourly) the high-speed fluctuation occurs, the frame image is formed when the temporary stop or the low-speed fluctuation immediately before the temporary stop occurs ( It is not necessary to perform the effect of (appearing). That is, the frame image may be hidden from the temporary stop state (sway fluctuation state) of the reach start of (c). As a result, unnecessary processing (effect) for forming (appearing) the frame image is not executed, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in (C), a suggestion image 551 suggesting that the predetermined zone (Tora zone) has been passed or that the predetermined zone has occurred is displayed as a related display related to the zone effect. Here, the suggestion image 551 is a character image "Tora zone" arranged in the horizontal strip-shaped frame, but may be displayed as "via the Tora zone". The suggestion image 551 may include not only a character image but also a horizontal strip-shaped frame. The suggestion image 551 serves as information regarding the zone effect. The suggestion image 551 may be displayed at the time when the background image is changed to a predetermined image in (ko). Further, the ally character 560a may be a tiger character 557 corresponding to a predetermined zone, and in this case, the ally character 560a may also be a suggestion image suggesting that the ally character 560a has passed through the predetermined zone (Tora zone). ..

The zone suggestion image 551 may be displayed inside the same diagonal strip-shaped frame as the mission achievement suggestion image 507. In this case, inside the diagonal band-shaped frame, the character image is scrolled and displayed in the direction along the band so as to repeat "mission achievement"-> "Tora zone"-> "mission achievement"->. Further, the zone suggestion image 551 may be displayed in another diagonal band-shaped frame different from the mission achievement suggestion image 507. In this case, the zone suggestion image 551 may be displayed at a position near or away from the suggestion image 507 in parallel with the mission achievement suggestion image 507. For example, the distant position may be a position in the upper left corner that overlaps with a special decorative symbol or movie 565 temporarily stopped by reach.

Subsequently, in (so), (ta), and (chi), a movie 565 in which the ally character 560a and the enemy character 560b compete against each other is displayed in the center of the screen as a battle effect. The battle production is included in the SP reach production peculiar to SP reach. Further, while the movie 565 is displayed, the BGM (BGM-e) related to the movie 565 is output from the speaker, and the number of pseudo fluctuations is intermittently displayed (hidden) as in "x3". (It becomes and is displayed). If you display it intermittently, you can hide it when it interferes with other productions such as cut-in notice, and it will not be tedious.

The movie 565 is displayed on the layer on the back side (lower layer) of the related display "Tora Zone" "x3", and the related display "Tora Zone" "x3" is on the front side layer (upper layer). ) Is displayed prominently. On the contrary, the related display "Tora zone" and "x3" may be displayed on the layer on the back side (lower layer) of the movie 565 so as not to interfere with the movie 565.

Subsequently, in (tsu), the special figure variation display game ends with a special result (big hit result), and the big hit stop symbols "4, 4, 4" are displayed in the variation display areas 610 and 615. If the special figure variation display game has a result other than the special result (off result), the out-of-order stop symbol is displayed in the variation display areas 610 and 615. In addition, the pending display 633a of the pending digestion region 640 is erased.

The variable hold display 633a may already be hidden during SP reach together with the hold display 633 (standby hold display) before the start of the change so as not to interfere with other effects such as the movie 565. Alternatively, at the timing when the color changes from green to red in (sa), the effect of the changing hold display 633a popping may be executed to hide the changing hold display 633a. Furthermore, after the variable pending display 633a pops off and disappears, instead of the red variable pending display, characters that suggest the expected degree of jackpot of the fluctuation in a display mode (color, font, size, etc.) (here, Red text) may be displayed. The effect of eliminating the hold display 633a during change and the subsequent display of red characters are a kind of hold change notice effect in which the display mode of hold changes.

In addition, following (C), after SP Reach further evolved into Premier Reach such as Full Rotation Reach (developed in multiple stages), in (T), as a result of the jackpot, the jackpot stop symbol "4, 4, 4" Is also possible. Or, after (S), without SP reach, after suddenly developing from N reach to Premier reach, in (T), the big hit stop symbol "4, 4, 4" is derived as a big hit result. Configuration is also possible.

After that, in (te), the fanfare effect is executed, and the fanfare image 567 (here, the character image "regular bonus") corresponding to the jackpot symbol type (B1802) is shown. If the symbol type is a normal jackpot symbol, the fanfare image 567 is a character image of "regular bonus", and if the symbol type is a probabilistic jackpot symbol, the fanfare image 567 is a character image of "big bonus". It may be there.

Further, in (te), at the same time as the fanfare image 567, a list 568 that collectively lists the predetermined effects that occurred during the current special figure variation display game (specific period), which was a big hit, is displayed on the display screen. As a result, the player can associate the result of the big hit with a plurality of effects that have appeared, and can guess the degree of expectation of the effect such as which effect is likely to occur in the case of a big hit, and the interest of the game is improved. .. The display of the list 568 or the display of each item in the list 568 is an explanatory display for explaining the predetermined effect that has been executed, and is a related display (one event, a predetermined event) related to the predetermined effect that has been executed. It becomes information about the predetermined production that has been executed as well as the related production and the specific production).

Each item "mission achievement", "red hold", "pseudo-ream (x3)", "tora zone", etc. in the list 568, which is the related display displayed after the derivation of the jackpot result, is displayed before the derivation of the jackpot result. The related displays such as (K) "Mission Achievement", (S) "Red Hold", (G) "x3", and (C) "Tora Zone" are display formats and display formats. The text content and display mode may be different. That is, the related display is the point before and after the derivation of the jackpot result, the point of whether or not the display format is the list format, and the point of the display mode such as the display position, size, color, font, etc. on the display screen. May be different in. As a result, each item in the list 568 becomes easy to see, the production is not monotonous, and the interest of the game is improved. Before and after the derivation of the jackpot result, all or part of the related display should be the same in part of the production mode (text content, size, color, font) so that it can be understood that it is related to a common predetermined production. You may.

As the predetermined effects shown in the list 568, in addition to the predetermined effects A to D, a reach effect, a step-up notice effect, a character movement effect, a group notice effect, a cut-in notice effect, and the like may be included. Further, the predetermined effects (or explanations thereof) shown in the list 568 may be arranged from top to bottom in descending order of expectation of big hit (the one with the highest expectation is displayed at the top). Further, the list 568 may be classified and displayed by dividing it into a predetermined effect having a high degree of expectation and a predetermined effect having a low degree of expectation.

Furthermore, at the same time as the fanfare image 567, it is suggested that the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the previous jackpot (or power-on) to the current jackpot was less than or equal to the specified number of times (one event, a predetermined event). Image 575 "speed" is displayed on the display screen. Image 575 shows how quickly the jackpot was hit this time since the last jackpot (or power was turned on). The player who sees the image 575 will be pleased that he has become a big hit at a high speed, and the interest of the game will be improved.

When the size of the list 568 becomes large due to the increase in the predetermined effects shown in the list 568, the display mode of the list 568 may be changed. For example, the display position of the characters in the list 568 or the list 568 may be changed, or the size of the list 568 (the size of the characters in the list 568) may be reduced so as not to overlap with the fanfare image 567 or the image 575. You can do it.

In addition, at the same time as the fanfare image 567, a sound corresponding to the expected degree of the big hit of the reach effect generated in the special figure variation display game which became the big hit this time (here, "I hit because the expectation is high") is generated from the speaker. As a result, the process of deriving the jackpot will be remembered after the deriving of the jackpot, and the interest of the game will be improved.

Next, in (g) and (na), the jackpot round effect is executed on the display screen as the effect during the jackpot round. In FIG. 44, the number of jackpot rounds (round upper limit) is 4 rounds. Along with the round production of the big hit, the payout display 570a and 570b showing the number of game balls (gained payouts) acquired by opening the big winning opening during the big hit is performed. Further, as a part of the jackpot round production, BGM (here, BGM-f) is output from the speaker at the volume level L3.

After that, in (d), the jackpot ending effect is executed on the display screen. Even in the jackpot ending effect, BGM (here, BGM-f) may be output from the speaker at the volume level L3 following the jackpot round effect. Along with the jackpot ending effect, a list 568a listing the current special figure variation display game that became a jackpot and the predetermined effect that occurred during the current jackpot is displayed on the display screen. In the list 568a, the contents showing the big hit effect (big hit round effect) of the list 568 to 4R are added. In addition, along with the jackpot ending effect and list 568a, a payout display 570c showing the total number of game balls (total number of winning balls) acquired by opening the big winning opening during the jackpot is performed, and the predetermined production and the total winning number are generated. Can be associated.

[Fluctuating speed pattern and frame image display]
The pattern of the fluctuation speed (movement speed) of the decorative special symbol on the display screen of the display device 41 is shown below.

As shown in FIG. 44, when there is a pseudo-continuous side effect and reach, as the change pattern I of the fluctuation speed, the right symbol and the left symbol are mainly stopped (stop symbol display) → low speed fluctuation → high speed fluctuation → ... → Low-speed fluctuation → Temporary stop (pseudo continuous production) → ・ ・ ・ → High-speed fluctuation → ・ ・ ・ → Low-speed fluctuation → Temporary stop (reach, shaking fluctuation) → Main stop (stop symbol display) Is the main stop (stop symbol display) → low speed fluctuation → high speed fluctuation → ・ ・ ・ → low speed fluctuation → pseudo continuous symbol display (pseudo continuous effect) → ・ ・ ・ → high speed fluctuation → ・ ・ ・ → low speed fluctuation → temporary stop ( A pattern such as (sway fluctuation immediately before the main stop) → main stop (stop symbol display) is taken. Here, the arrow "→" indicates the transition (transition) of the state of the fluctuating velocity.

Unlike FIG. 44, in a normal case where there is no pseudo-ream side effect and reach, each decorative special symbol (left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) is stopped (stop symbol display) as the change pattern II of the fluctuation speed. It takes a pattern such as low-speed fluctuation → high-speed fluctuation → ・ ・ ・ → low-speed fluctuation → temporary stop (sway fluctuation immediately before the main stop) → main stop (stop symbol display). The change pattern II appears more frequently than the change pattern I.

In the change patterns I and II, the frame image (character image is also possible) of the special decorative symbol may be hidden or deleted before the high-speed fluctuation occurs, and only the number (numerical image) may change at high speed. The numbers may also be translucent to make them difficult to see. Further, in the change patterns I and II, when a temporary stop or a low-speed change immediately before the temporary stop occurs, an effect of forming (appearing) a frame image of a special decorative symbol (for example, a fade-in that gradually becomes darker and appears from a light state). The effect) may be executed, and the main stop may be made after the temporary stop. As a result, the fluctuation time can be extended, the hold can be saved, and the movement of the special decorative symbol can be diversified to improve the interest.

When the number of special figure 1 hold (or the number of special figure 2 hold) is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 4), the fluctuation time is shortened and the fluctuation is performed, and the effect of forming the frame image and the temporary stop are omitted. A frame image of a decorative special symbol may be displayed at any time during low-speed fluctuation. In this case, for example, the change pattern II in the normal case described above is a shortened variation such as main stop (stop symbol display) → low speed fluctuation → high speed fluctuation → ... → low speed fluctuation → main stop (stop symbol display). It becomes pattern IIa. Therefore, as the number of patterns increases according to the number of reservations, the movements of the special decorative symbols become more diverse, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, it is possible to appropriately cope with a short fluctuation time.

Further, specially, in the normal electric support state (probability change state or time saving state), the frame image itself may not be displayed, and the decorative special symbol may always be composed of only numbers (numerical images). In the normal electric support state, the number of reserved special figures 2 is often a predetermined number (for example, 4) or more, and the above-mentioned shortened fluctuation pattern IIa often appears. Therefore, in the configuration in which the frame image itself is not always displayed, there is little unnecessary processing (effect) such as hiding or displaying the frame image, and the effect can proceed smoothly.

Alternatively, in the normal electric support state, in the normal case where there is no pseudo-ream side effect and SP reach, the effect of forming a frame image and the temporary stop are omitted regardless of the size of the number of holds and the length of the fluctuation time. The shortened variation pattern IIa may always be selected. In this case, there is little unnecessary processing (effect) related to the formation effect of the frame image, temporary stop, etc., and the effect can proceed smoothly. In the normal power support state, as in the state other than the normal power support state (normal game state), the shortened fluctuation pattern IIa (the number of holds is predetermined) as described above according to the size of the hold number and the length of the fluctuation time. When the number is more than the number, the fluctuation time is short) and the change pattern II (when the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, the fluctuation time is long) may be used properly.

Further, in the normal electric support state, another frame image (character image may be used) different from the normal game state may be added to the numbers to form a decorative special pattern. For example, a frame image smaller than the normal game state is added to the number, only the effect is added to the number, a small decorative image is added to the number part, and another frame image that is not noticeable and does not feel strange is added. .. In this way, the production can proceed smoothly.

[Example of production A (zone production) and its related display]
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of effect A (zone effect) and its related display on the display screen of the display device 41. The pattern A0 in the upper row is obtained by extracting the relevant parts from the display screens of (K), (S), and (C) of FIG. In (ke), the character display 550 indicates that the user is entering a predetermined zone (Tora zone), and then in (shi), the background becomes an image peculiar to the zone as shown by diagonal lines within the period of the zone. After that, in (C), a suggestion image 551 suggesting that the N reach has evolved to the SP reach and that the player has passed through a predetermined zone (Tora zone) is displayed.

In the middle pattern A1, the suggestion image 551a suggesting that the image has passed through a predetermined zone (Tora zone) in (C-A1) after developing to SP reach via (K) and (S) is shown in (C). Unlike the suggestion image 551, it is displayed in the same place as the suggestion image 507 (FIG. 44C) of mission achievement. The suggestion image 551a is a character image (here, "via the Tora zone") arranged diagonally in a band-shaped frame like the suggestion image 507, but in order to improve the interest in association with a predetermined zone, The same color or pattern as the background of the zone may be added in the frame.

The diagonal strip-shaped frame is a place where characters are commonly displayed. When the suggestion image 507 of mission achievement occurs, the mission achievement is generally more important than the zone production, or the expectation of a big hit is high. Therefore, the suggestion image 507 is placed on the front side of the suggestion image 551a rather than the suggestion image 551a. Display on the layer (upper layer) and give priority.

In the lower pattern A2, a suggestion image 551b suggesting that the player has passed through a predetermined zone (Tora zone) is displayed in (S-A2) after the development to SP reach via (K) and (S). Unlike the suggested images 551 and 551a, the suggested image 551b has a ring-shaped shape, and is composed of a ring-shaped frame and a plurality of character images "Tora zone". Within the ring-shaped frame, a plurality of character images "Tora Zone" are displayed in a ring-shaped form. The ring is a circular ring here, but may be an elliptical ring or a polygonal ring.

The center case 40 (constituent member, front component) forms a window portion that makes the display device 41 (display means) visible from the front, and the suggested image 551b shows the edge of the center case 40 on the window portion side (particularly). , The edge of the side effect unit 40d) has an annular shape. As a result, the suggestion image 551b suggesting that a predetermined zone has occurred can be displayed to the maximum within a visible range. If most of the suggested image 551b can be visually recognized, a part of the suggested image 551b may be hidden by the edge on the window side (particularly, the edge of the side effect unit 40d).

Further, the suggestion image 551b rotates or stops clockwise or counterclockwise depending on the degree of expectation of the jackpot, and the interest of the game is improved. For example, in the suggestion image 551b, clockwise rotation> counterclockwise rotation> stop in descending order of expectation of big hit (in descending order). Inside the suggestion image 551b so as to be surrounded by the ring-shaped suggestion image 551b, a friendly character 560a, an enemy character 560b, and an expectation degree display 561 (star mark) are displayed. Depending on the degree of expectation indicated by the display 561, it may rotate clockwise, rotate counterclockwise, or stop.

In (S-A2), each decorative special symbol (left symbol, right symbol) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the annular suggestion image 551b. In this case, in order to make it easier to see the character "Tora Zone", each decorative special pattern does not have a square frame and consists only of the number "4".

The patterns A0, A1 and A2 having different display modes may be selected according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot (which may be indicated by the degree of expectation display 561). For example, in descending order of expectation of big hit (largest order), pattern A2> pattern A1> pattern A0.

[Example of production B (mission production) and its related display]
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of effect B (mission effect) and its related display on the display screen of the display device 41. The upper pattern B0 is obtained by extracting the relevant parts from the display screens of (c), (c), and (c) of FIG. 44. In (c), the character display 501 indicates that the mission mode has been entered, and the character display 502 indicating the content of a predetermined mission of reaching with the symbol 4 is displayed. After that, in (c), the mission is accomplished by temporarily stopping the left symbol and the right symbol with the same symbol "4" and entering the reach state, and the mission achievement suggestion image 507 is displayed. After that, in (C), the N reach is developed to the SP reach, and the left symbol "4" and the right symbol "4" are moved to the upper left and right corners of the display screen and displayed in a reduced size. As described in FIG. 44C, the mission achievement suggestion image 507 and the zone suggestion image 551 may be displayed inside the same diagonal band-shaped frame. Further, the zone suggestion image 551 may be displayed at a position near or away from the suggestion image 507 in parallel with the mission achievement suggestion image 507.

In the lower pattern B1, after passing through (c), in (ku-B1), in order to make it easier to grasp that the mission has been achieved by the reach of the symbol 4, the left symbol "4" and the right symbol "4" in the center of the screen and the right symbol " A plurality of (two) suggested images 507a and 507b are displayed in the same color (here, red) as the numbers of the left symbol "4" and the right symbol "4" so as to face each of "4". The suggested images 507a and 507b are completely stopped, and it is easy to distinguish between the left symbol "4" and the right symbol "4" which are swaying and fluctuating during the temporary stop.

Subsequently, also in (S-B1), the suggestion image 507c is placed between the left symbol "4" and the right symbol "4" in order to make it easier to grasp that the mission has been achieved by the reach of the symbol 4. It is displayed in the same color (red in this case) as the numbers of the symbol "4" and the right symbol "4". The suggested image 507c is completely stopped, and it is easy to distinguish between the left symbol "4" and the right symbol "4" which are swaying and fluctuating during the temporary stop.

The suggestion images 507a and 507b and the suggestion image 507c showing that the mission has been achieved include a band-shaped frame and the text image "mission achievement" as in the suggestion image 507 of (C), but unlike the suggestion image 507, they are horizontal. It is arranged and easy to see.

Further, in the pattern B1, unlike the pattern B0, the suggested images 507a and 507b and the suggested image 507c have different display modes before and after the development to the SP reach (first half of the reach and the second half of the reach), and the effect is rich in variation. It will be. That is, with the development to SP reach, the display mode of the suggestion image indicating that the mission has been achieved changes.

The patterns B0 and B1 having different display modes may be selected according to the degree of expectation of a big hit (which may be indicated by the degree of expectation display 561). For example, pattern B1> pattern B0 in descending order of expectation of big hit (largest order).

[Example of production C (pseudo continuous production) and its related display]
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of effect C (pseudo continuous effect) and its related display on the display screen of the display device 41. The upper pattern C0 is obtained by extracting the relevant parts from the display screens of (f), (ki), (ku), and (se) of FIG. In (f), a special image (character image "NEXT") is included in the pseudo-continuous symbol 504 and displayed. After that, in (G), as a related display related to the executed pseudo continuous effect (display of the special image "NEXT" or temporary stop display of the left and right symbols), the number of pseudo fluctuations displayed after the temporary stop display 505 ("" × 3 ”) is displayed. After that, it becomes reach in (ku) and develops into SP reach in (se), but the number display 505 ("x3") of the pseudo fluctuation goes to SP reach so as not to interfere with the movie 565 in SP reach. May be hidden during or just before the development of. In the upper pattern C0, the number of pseudo-reams, which is the final number of pseudo-variations, is three.

In the lower pattern C1, the number of pseudo-reams, which is the final number of pseudo-variations, is two. In the lower pattern C1, (d) and (e) in FIG. 44 are omitted, and in (car C1), the decorative special symbol is temporarily stopped, but unlike the pattern C0, the special image "NEXT" is included. Pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed. After that, in (key C1), the number of pseudo fluctuations displayed after the temporary stop display 505 (“× 2”) is displayed as the related display related to the executed pseudo continuous effect (temporary stop display of the left and right symbols). Will be done. After that, it becomes reach in (ku) and develops into SP reach in (se), but the number display 505 ("x2") of the pseudo fluctuation goes to SP reach so as not to interfere with the movie 565 in SP reach. May be hidden during or just before the development of.

It should be noted that, in order to facilitate time management in the effect control device 300, regarding the number of final pseudo fluctuations (pseudo-ream number), the number of times displayed 505 (“× 3” or “× 2”) is displayed. The length may be constant regardless of the number of times (3 times or 2 times). Regarding patterns C0 and C1, that is, the number of pseudo-reams (3 times or 2 times), the high (magnitude) of the expectation of a big hit is pattern C0> pattern C1.

[Example of production D (precursor production of pending change production) and its related display]
FIG. 48A is a diagram showing an example of effect D (precursor effect of hold change effect) and its related display (hold change effect, etc.) on the display screen of the display device 41. The upper pattern D0 is obtained by extracting the relevant parts from the display screens of (ko), (sa), and (shi) of FIG. As a precursor effect of (ko), the character 556 appears on the display screen and operates so as to act on the pending display 633a during fluctuation. After that, in (sa), as a related display (specific effect) related to the precursor effect, the hold change notice effect in which the changing hold display 633a changes from green to red is executed. After that, in (shi), a character image 558 (“red hold”) indicating that the hold display has changed to red is displayed as a related display (specific effect) related to the precursor effect and the hold change notice effect.

In the lower pattern D1, in (co-D1), instead of the character 556 appearing and operating, the operation promotion display 577 prompting the operation of the effect button 25 (operation means) is displayed as a precursor effect. The operation promotion display 577 (operation promotion image) includes an image display 577a that requires the player to press and operate the effect button 25 imitating the effect button 25, and a time gauge 577b that indicates the operation valid period. The image display 577a includes a character display such as "press a button" or "PUSH". For example, in B2015 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 31), the effect control device 300 displays the operation promotion display 577 related to the hold change notice effect as a part of the look-ahead effect when the number of holds is reduced (at the time of hold shift). Can be set.

When the effect button 25 is in the operation valid period, it shifts to the state of (sa), and after the hold change notice effect is executed as the related display related to the precursor effect, it shifts to the state of (shi). .. When the effect button 25 is not in the operation valid period, the state shifts to the state of (Sur D1), and after the changing hold display 633a changes to the "?" Mark as a related display related to the precursor effect, (? ) Shifts to the state. Regardless of whether or not the effect button 25 is operated, the changing hold display 633a is finally turned red in (S).

The patterns D0 and D1 having different display modes may be selected according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, pattern D0> pattern D1 in descending order of expectation of big hit (largest order). Even when the pending display 633a is finally turned red, the degree of expectation may be slightly different depending on the patterns D0 and D1.

FIG. 48B is a diagram showing more specifically an example of a precursory effect on the display screen of the display device 41. As a precursory effect of (ko), the tiger character 556 acts as if it were pierced by a spear and acts on the pending display 633a, but after (ke) and before (ko) in FIG. 44B (ke). 1a) (Ke-1b) (Ke-1c) (Ke-1d) may perform character production by the tiger character 556 (character image) as shown in (Ke-1d). The character effect may be regarded as a precursor effect for the precursor effect of (ko), or may be regarded as a part of the precursor effect of (ko). The precursory effect of (ko) is a related effect (specific effect, related display) related to the character effect.

In the character effect of (ke-1a), the tiger character 556 stands by in a standby posture at the operating position before displaying the operating moving image (before operating). For example, the standby posture is a resting posture that makes you think that you have time to move, and you do not have a spear. Here, the tiger character 556 has the same operating position (operating position) and standby position. Since it is easy to understand that such a character effect is a suggestion (precursor) that the character 556 operates, the player looks at the vicinity of the target hold display in which the character 556 is scheduled to act to change the mode (hold change). You can see the character movements and pending changes without missing them. As described above, the target hold display that is the target of the hold change notice effect is basically the changing hold display 633a, but the hold display 633 may also be used. In addition, such a character effect can be strongly related to the later precursor effect (ko).

In the character effect of (K-1b), the tiger character 556 stands by in a posture for operating at the operating position before displaying the operating moving image (before operating). The character 556 may stand by in the form of being paused immediately before or at an initial stage of one operation. In such a character effect, it is not necessary to prepare a character image relating to the character 556 in the standby posture, and the capacity of the image data stored in the image ROM 325 can be suppressed. In addition, such a character effect can be strongly related to a later precursor effect.

In the character effect of (ke-1c), the tiger character 556 is displayed in a standby position different from the operation position before the operation (before being displayed near the target hold display). That is, the tiger character 556 has a different operating position (operating position) and a standby position. Such a character effect is less likely to interfere with other effects, and the player pays close attention to the entire display screen.

In the character production of (K-1d), the tiger character 556 is displayed and hidden repeatedly at the edge of the display screen, etc., before it operates (before it is displayed near the target hold display). Is displayed. Here, too, the tiger character 556 has a different operating position (operating position) and a standby position. The character 556 may blink in a standby posture, in a posture as if it was paused immediately before or at an initial stage of one operation. In such a character effect, in addition to suggesting that the character 556 operates by the blinking display, it is less likely to interfere with other effects, and the player pays attention to the entire display screen.

[Example 1 of fanfare production (post-notification of expectations)]
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example 1 of a fanfare effect executed after the jackpot result (big hit stop symbol) is derived. In Example 1 of the fanfare effect, the degree of expectation regarding the effect generated in the process until the special figure variation display game reaches the jackpot result is notified in the fanfare effect after the jackpot result is derived (after the jackpot stop symbol is displayed).

In FIG. 49, in particular, the degree of expectation regarding the reach effect is notified in the fanfare effect, but the degree of expectation of an effect other than the reach effect (for example, a zone effect) may be notified.

The pattern E0 in the upper row is a part extracted from the display screens of (se), (tsu), and (te) in FIG. 44. In (C), N reach (first half of reach) develops to become SP reach, and the left symbol "4" and the right symbol "4" move, and the SP reach production that directs the battle between the friendly character 560a and the enemy character 560b. Is started. After that, in (tsu), the jackpot stop symbol "4, 4, 4" is displayed as the jackpot result.

After that, in (te), as a fanfare effect, a fanfare image 567 (character image "regular bonus") corresponding to the jackpot symbol type (B1802) is displayed. Furthermore, during the fanfare production, a voice production that suggests that the expectation of the jackpot of the SP reach (SP reach production) was high among the multiple reach (multiple reach production) is executed by the output of the sound from the speaker. Will be done. This audio production is a specific production related to the occurrence of a highly expected reach production (one event, a predetermined event). The expectation of SP reach is higher than that of no reach or N reach.

For example, as a sound production, voices such as "I got a hit because I have high expectations" and "I was a big hit because I have high expectations for reach" are generated. Also, in the case of SP reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game is longer than in the case of only N reach without SP reach (generally, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit). A voice such as "I hit because the fluctuation time is long" may be generated. In addition, instead of the sound effect, the display effect may be executed by displaying a character image suggesting that the expectation of the big hit was high on the display device 41.

The degree of expectation of the SP reach production can be notified in advance at the start or before the start of the SP reach production (especially the battle production) as in (C), and the SP reach production as in (Te). It is possible to notify after the end at the end or after the end. As a result, the player can well remember the degree of expectation of the production, and the interest of the game will be improved in the special figure variation display game from the next time.

In the middle pattern E1, the N reach (first half of the reach) starts at (ku), but it does not develop into the SP reach, and the jackpot result (big hit stop symbol) is displayed at the end of the N reach at (tsu). .. That is, the effects (C) to (H) in FIG. 44 are not executed.

After that, in (Te-E1), a fanfare image 567 is displayed as a fanfare effect. Furthermore, during the fanfare production, the speaker is a voice production that suggests that the expectation of the jackpot of N reach (N reach production) was the lowest or low among the multiple reach (multiple reach production). Performed by audio output from. This audio effect is a specific effect related to the occurrence of a reach effect (one event, a predetermined event) with the lowest expectation or the lower expectation. The expectation of N reach is higher than that without reach, but lower than that of SP reach and premier reach, and is the lowest among a plurality of reach (plural reach productions). For example, voices such as "You hit well even though your expectations are low", "You hit a big hit even though your expectations for reach are the lowest", and "You hit a short fluctuation time" are generated.

In this way, after a big hit result is obtained via the N reach effect (predetermined reach effect), which has the lowest expectation among the multiple reach effects, the sound effect suggesting that the expectation was the lowest (the voice effect). Specific production) is executed. Therefore, the player can get a feeling of happiness that he was lucky enough to be a big hit and a sense of accomplishment that his expectation is at least a big hit, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the middle pattern E2, in (a), the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are all changing, and in (tsu), the jackpot result (big hit stop symbol) is displayed without causing reach. That is, the effects (c) to (chi) of FIG. 44 are not executed.

After that, in (Te-E2), a fanfare image 567 is displayed as a fanfare effect. Further, during the fanfare effect, a display effect suggesting that the expectation of the jackpot was almost zero is executed by the character image 581 (character display) on the display device 41. This display effect is a specific effect related to the occurrence of an effect (one event, a predetermined event) having a degree of expectation of almost zero. The expectation of a jackpot without reach is lower than that of N reach, which is almost zero. For example, a character image 581 (character display) showing characters such as "I hit well even though the expectation is almost zero" is displayed. In addition, since it is rare that a big hit is made without reach, in order to please the player, a voice such as "I hit well even though the expectation is almost zero" may be generated as a voice production.

In this way, the effect control device 300 can select whether to execute the specific effect related to the effect as the display effect or the sound effect, depending on the degree of expectation of the effect or the content of the effect, and the effect can be selected. It will be rich in variety and the fun of the game will improve.

It should be noted that the audio and display effects of (Te) (Te-E1) and (Te-E2) in FIG. 49 are replaced during the big hit fanfare production or in addition to the big hit fanfare production, and during the big hit round production, the big hit. It may be executed during the ending effect.

[Example 2 of fanfare production (notification of the process up to the big hit)]
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing Example 2 of the fanfare effect executed after the jackpot result is derived. In Example 2 of the fanfare effect, the process until the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit result is notified in the fanfare effect after the big hit result is derived (after the big hit stop symbol is displayed).

In particular, in FIG. 50, the image 575 (character image “fast” and “fastest”) suggesting that the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the previous jackpot (or power-on) to the current jackpot was less than the specified number of times. ) Is displayed on the display screen as a specific effect. The specified number of times (specified number of games) is, for example, 10 times or 5 times. Here, the image 575 is a character image surrounded by a frame. The image 575 is an image related to the result of a big hit (one event, a predetermined event) in the special figure variation display game within the specified number of games after the end of the latest big hit (or the power is turned on). Compared with the case where there is no image 575, the player becomes aware of making a big hit quickly, so that the interest of the game is improved.

The pattern F0 in the upper row is a part extracted from the display screen of (tsu) (te) in FIG. 44. The pattern F0 is executed when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the previous jackpot (or power-on) to the current jackpot is 10 times or less (and 6 times or more). In (tsu), the jackpot stop symbol "4, 4, 4" is displayed as the jackpot result. After that, in (Te), a fanfare image 567 (character image "regular bonus") is displayed as a fanfare effect, and a special figure within 10 games (and 6 games or more) after the end of the latest big hit (or power on). The image 575 "speed" suggesting that the big hit result was obtained in the variable display game is displayed.

The middle pattern F1 is executed when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the previous jackpot (or power-on) to the current jackpot is 5 or less. In (T-F1a), after the stop symbol display of (T), the first image 575a "most" and the second image 575b "speed" appear at the respective initial positions on the display screen of the display device 41 in the fanfare effect. Then, a movement effect of moving so as to approach the same place (combination position) on the display screen is executed. For example, the coalescing position is a position facing the fanfare image 567 at the lower right of the fanfare image 567 (character image "regular bonus"). The first image 575a "maximum" and the second image 575b "speed" may appear from the stage of displaying the stop symbol in (tsu).

Subsequently, in (Te-F1b), a coalescence effect (composite effect) is executed in which the first image 575a "most" and the second image 575b "speed" are united (combined), and after the latest big hit is completed (or the power is turned on). ) To display the image 575 "fastest" suggesting that the big hit result was obtained in the special figure fluctuation display game within 5 games. Here, at the same time, a sound effect that generates the sound "fastest" from the speaker may be executed, and it may be impressed that the big hit result is obtained very quickly after the end of the latest big hit (or the power is turned on). The coalescing effect is a kind of forming effect that forms the image 575 "fastest", and the forming effect that makes the image 575 "fastest" appear to be gradually darkened (for example, the transparency is changed from 100% to 0%). Fade-in effect) or a formation effect in which the image 575 "fastest" is gradually displayed from a part to the whole may be executed.

The first image 575a includes the "fastest" character image, which is a part of the character "fastest" of the image 575, in the frame. The second image 575b includes a character image of "fast" which is a part of the character "fastest" of the image 575 in the frame. For example, in the union effect (composite effect), an effect is executed in which a part of the frame of the first image 575a and the frame of the second image 575b disappears and is combined.

The lower pattern F2 is executed when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the previous jackpot (or power-on) to the current jackpot is 11 times or more. In (T-F2), after the stop symbol display of (tsu), only the fanfare image 567 is displayed in the fanfare effect, but the image 575 is not displayed.

In this way, when an event occurs in a special figure variation display game within a specified number of games after the end of the latest jackpot (or power-on), the display device 41 (display means) displays an image related to the event. A specific effect for displaying 575 is executed. Then, in the specific effect, the first image and the second image are moved on the display screen of the display device 41 to display the combined (combined) image 575. If an effect of combining (combining) the first image and the second image is generated according to the specified number of games, the specific effect of displaying the image 575 becomes interesting.

It should be noted that between (tsu) and (te) of the upper pattern F0 and between (tsu) and (te-F2) of the lower pattern F2, as in (te-F1b) of the middle pattern F1. In addition, a movement effect in which the first image 575a "most" and the second image 575b "speed" appear and move may be executed. However, the combination of the first image 575a "most" and the second image 575b "fast" fails. That is, the upper pattern F0 and the lower pattern F2 may be executed as a coalescence failure pattern.

For example, as the failure pattern 1, in the upper pattern F0, the first image 575a "most" and the second image 575b "speed" do not stick to each other (without contacting each other) in the stage before (te). Only 575a "most" may disappear out of the display screen, and the second image 575b "speed" may remain in the display screen in (te). Further, for example, as the failure pattern 2, in the lower pattern F2, the first image 575a "most" and the second image 575b "speed" do not stick to each other (without contact) in the stage before (T-F2). , Both disappear out of the display screen, and in (T-F2), both the first image 575a "most" and the second image 575b "speed" may not remain in the display screen.

In addition, the display of the image 575 of (te) (te-F1) (te-F2) of FIG. 50 is replaced during the big hit fanfare production or during the big hit fanfare production, and during the big hit round production, the big hit ending. It may be executed during the production.

[Example 3 of fanfare production (others)]
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing Example 3 of a fanfare effect executed after the jackpot result is derived, as another example other than the above Examples 1 and 2.

In particular, in FIG. 51, an image relating to one event (predetermined event) appears by operating the effect button 25 (operating means) during the fanfare effect.

The upper pattern G0 is the same as the pattern F0 of FIG. 50, but after the stop symbol display of (tsu), in (te-G0), an operation promotion display prompting the operation of the effect button 25 in the fanfare effect. 577 is displayed. The effect control device 300 can set the display of the operation promotion display 577 by, for example, the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) of the hit system command process (FIG. 32). The operation promotion display 577 (operation promotion image) includes an image display 577a that requests the operation of the effect button 25, and a time gauge 577b that indicates the operation valid period. The operation promotion display 577 may be the same as that displayed in (C-D1) of the pattern D1 of FIG. 48, but may be different. If they are the same, the operation of the effect button 25 can be promoted in common, but if they are different, the operation-compatible effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 25 (the display of the image 575 and the list 568 of (te)) and (co) -It is easy to understand that the pending change notice effect of D1) is different.

When the effect button 25 is operated during the operation valid period, next (te) displays a list 568 of predetermined effects that occurred during the latest special figure variation display game (specific period) as an operation-corresponding effect. Furthermore, as one event, if a jackpot result is obtained in a special figure variation display game within the specified number of games (for example, within 10 games) after the end of the latest jackpot (or power on), image 575 as an operation-compatible effect. Is displayed in the fanfare production. Image 575 displays information "speed" about one event. Listing 568 also displays information about one event (a predetermined effect that occurred during the special figure variation display game).

Here, simply, with one operation of the effect button 25, both the list 568 and the image 575 are displayed. However, the list 568 (or image 575) may be automatically displayed regardless of the operation of the effect button 25, and only the image 575 (or image 568) may be displayed as an operation-compatible effect corresponding to the operation. By doing so, the display timing of the list 568 and the display timing of the image 575 can be shifted, and it is possible to prevent the player from rushing to look at both the list 568 and the image 575 at the same time.

Further, the list 568 may be displayed by one operation, and the image 575 may be displayed by another one operation. In this case as well, the display timing of the list 568 and the display timing of the image 575 can be shifted. .. Further, in this case, for the sake of simplicity, it is sufficient to display only one operation promotion display 577 for displaying the list 568 or the image 575, but the player needs to operate the display twice or more. , "Operate twice", "Strike repeatedly", and the like, the image display 577a including the character display prompting the operation twice or more is preferable.

The pattern G1 in the middle stage displays the operation promotion display 577 in the fanfare effect in (Te-G1a) in the same manner as (Te-G0) of the pattern G0. Then, when the effect button 25 is operated during the operation valid period, then, in (T-G1b), as one event, the number of appearances of reach after the end of the latest jackpot (or power-on) is within the specified number of times. When a big hit result is obtained (for example, within 7 times), an image 582 indicating that fact is displayed as a specific effect. Image 582 displays information about one event, "big hit within 7 reach".

The lower pattern G2 displays the operation promotion display 577 in the fanfare effect in (T-G2a) in the same manner as (T-G0) of the pattern G1. Then, when the effect button 25 is operated during the operation valid period, then, in (T-G2b), as one event, the number of appearances of the hold change notice effect after the end of the latest big hit (or power on) is displayed. When a big hit result is obtained within a specified number of times (for example, within 5 times), an image 583 indicating that fact is displayed as a specific effect. Image 583 displays information about one event, "big hit within 5 pending changes".

As the content shown in the image 582 and the image 583, the number of consecutive villas, which is the number of consecutive occurrences of big hits that do not go through the normal gaming state, may be a predetermined number or more.

In this way, it is possible to display (notify) information about one event in a predetermined display period (predetermined period) after the effect button 25 (operation means) is operated. Therefore, when the player does not want to display the information about one event and does not operate the effect button 25, the information about one event is not displayed and can be matched to the player's request. For example, the predetermined display period (predetermined period) is a period from the operation of the effect button 25 to the end of the fanfare effect.

It should be noted that the display of the images 575, 582, and image 583 of (Te) (Te-G1) and (Te-G2) of FIG. 51 is replaced during the big hit fanfare production, or in addition to the big hit fanfare production. It may be executed during the round production or the jackpot ending production.

[Time chart of specific production (image display)]
FIG. 52 is a time chart relating to the display of the image 575 as the specific effect of FIGS. 50 and 51. The state of waiting for customers in FIG. 52 may be changed to a big hit state, and the normal game state may be changed to a normal electric support state (electric support state, time saving state or probable change state).

After the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the customer waiting state in which the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41 can be executed is entered, but after that, the special figure variation display game (design variation) starts and the normal game state is entered. After that, when the jackpot stop symbol is displayed, the jackpot state (special game state) starts, and the jackpot fanfare, the jackpot round, and the jackpot ending are executed. After the jackpot state ends, it will be in the normal power support state (electric support state, time saving state or probability change state).

The number of executions (number of games) of the special figure variation display game may be displayed on the display device 41 or a display device (sub display device) other than the display device 41 in the normal game state and the general electric support state. .. Further, in the normal game state, the fluctuation time is basically shorter than that in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game per unit time is larger than that in the normal game state.

When a big hit result is obtained in the special figure fluctuation display game within 5 games from the power-on, the image 575 "fastest" of the pattern F1 is displayed as a specific effect during the fanfare. In this case, first, a movement effect of moving the first image 575a "most" and the second image 575b "speed" closer to each other on the display screen is executed during the movement period. After that, on the display screen, the image 575 "fastest", which is a combination (composite) of the first image 575a "fastest" and the second image 575b "fast", is displayed during a predetermined display period (predetermined period).

When a big hit result is obtained in the special figure fluctuation display game within 10 games (and 6 games or more) after the power is turned on, the image 575 "speed" of the pattern F0 is displayed as a specific effect during the fanfare, but the movement effect is It does not have to be executed (when the above-mentioned failure pattern is not provided). Instead of the movement effect, the operation promotion display 577 may be displayed before the display of the image 575 “speed” as in the pattern G0 (te-G0) of FIG. 51 (dotted line in FIG. 52). The operation promotion display 577 is displayed during the operation valid period. When the effect button 25 is operated during the operation valid period, the image 575 "speed" is displayed for a predetermined display period (predetermined period).

The movement period of the movement effect may be shorter, longer, or the same as the operation valid period. If the movement period is longer than the operation valid period, the movement effect can be performed slowly, and the player can take a closer look at the movement effect.

In order not to confuse the player, the image 575 "fastest" of the pattern F1 may have the same display timing and display period (predetermined period) as the image 575 ("fast") of the pattern F0. In FIG. 52, the end of the display period is aligned with the end of the fanfare period, but the present invention is not limited to this (for example, the operation validity period of the operation promotion display 577 for list display is provided after the movement period. If you can).

Note that FIG. 52 shows a case where the list 568 is automatically displayed regardless of the operation of the effect button 25, and although there is only one operation valid period (width of the dotted line in FIG. 52), the effect button 25 is displayed once. When both the list 568 and the image 575 are displayed by the operation of, the operation is important, and therefore, for example, the operation valid period may be longer than the movement period. Further, when the list 568 is displayed by one operation and the image 575 is displayed by another one operation, two operation valid periods may be provided separately.

Further, when displaying the image 575 "fastest", the operation promotion display 577 for displaying the list 568 (list display) may be displayed, but the "fastest" and "fast" movement effects (tea) may be displayed. The operation promotion display 577 may be displayed except during the movement period in which the movement effect is executed so as not to interfere with F1a). That is, the operation valid period in which the operation promotion display 577 for list display is displayed may be set before or after the movement period so as not to overlap with the movement period. Further, when the display is performed so as not to interfere with the movement effect (Tee F1a), the operation promotion display 577 for list display can be displayed during the movement period. The display itself of the list 568 may also be displayed so as not to interfere with the movement effect.

[Example of list display]
FIG. 53 shows an example in which, when the special figure variation display game results in an outlier, the list 568 of the predetermined effects generated up to that point is displayed while waiting for a customer who can execute the customer waiting demo. In addition, in (te) and (d) of FIG. 44 (D), when the special figure variation display game results in a big hit, the list 568 is shown in the fanfare production and the big hit ending production in the big hit state (special game state). It was.

In FIG. 53 (c), the result of the loss of the special figure variation display game (the stop symbol of the loss) is displayed. After that, in (H), the player stops the game and is waiting for a customer, and the customer waiting demonstration is executed on the display device 41.

When a predetermined operation of the effect button 25 is performed while waiting for a customer, the process shifts to (f) to list the predetermined effects that occurred during the past special figure variation display game (specific period) one game before. List 568 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. If the game machine 10 is provided with a cross key, a predetermined operation of the cross key may be performed instead of the effect button 25.

Along with Listing 568, a display area 586 for selecting to proceed to the next display with the characters "Next" and a selection to return to the previous display with the characters "Back". The display area 587 for the purpose is displayed on the display screen. On the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25, the "next" display area 586 or the "return" display area 587 is selected by performing a touch operation by the movement of the finger in the left-right direction (movement of the touch portion). The selected item is displayed in a specific display mode. As a specific display mode, for example, in addition to a highlight display that brightly displays the selected item, there is a highlight display that shows a thick frame and an enlarged display that increases the size of the selected item.

When the display area 586 of "Next" is selected and there is a confirmation operation such as pressing the effect button 25, the process shifts from (F) to (F) and the past special feature two games ago. Figure Fluctuation display A list 568 listing predetermined effects generated during the game (specific period) is displayed on the display screen of the display device. Along with Listing 568, the "Next" display area 586 and the "Back" display area 587 are displayed on the display screen.

Similarly, when the display area 586 of "Next" is selected and there is a confirmation operation such as a pressing operation of the effect button 25, the process shifts from (he) to (e) and three games before. A list 568 listing predetermined effects that have occurred during the past special figure variation display game (specific period) is displayed on the display screen of the display device. Along with Listing 568, the "Next" display area 586 and the "Back" display area 587 are displayed on the display screen.

Similarly, when the display area 586 of "Next" is selected and there is a confirmation operation such as a pressing operation of the effect button 25, the game shifts from (e) to (ma) and the past 50 games are played. The list 569, which lists the predetermined effects generated during the special figure variation display game (specific period), is displayed on the display screen of the display device. Unlike the list 568 of (f) to (e), the list 569 of (ma) has an item display unit 569a showing a predetermined effect as an item, and a histogram of the number of occurrences in 50 games for the predetermined effect of each item. It is composed of the occurrence number display unit 569b to be displayed as. In addition, the number of occurrences of a predetermined effect in the past 50 games may be indicated numerically.

In addition, in the list 569 of (ma), the hold change notice effect may be displayed as one item collectively for the hold change to each color (blue, green, red, etc.). As for the reach effect, various reach effects (N reach, SP reach, etc.) may be collectively displayed as one item. The pseudo continuous effect may also be collectively displayed as one item regardless of the number of pseudo continuous productions (2 times, 3 times, etc.).

Along with the list 569 and the "back" display area 587, the display screen displays the word "end" and the display area 589 for selecting to end the list display replaces the "next" display area 586. Is displayed in. If the display area 589 of "End" is selected and there is a confirmation operation such as a pressing operation of the effect button 25, the display of the list 569 ends and the process returns to the customer waiting demo of (H).

The list 568 and 569 may disappear after the end of the predetermined display period (predetermined period) if the effect button 25 is not operated after the display. In this way, in the predetermined display period after the effect button 25 (operation means) is operated, the information regarding the predetermined effect (one event) that occurred during the past special figure variation display game is displayed by the list 568 and 569. It can be displayed. Therefore, when the player does not want to display the information and does not operate the effect button 25, the list 568 and 569 are not displayed after the lapse of the predetermined display period (predetermined period), and the information is matched to the player's request. Can be done. The predetermined display period may be about several minutes.

Further, since the predetermined display period (predetermined period) is the period in which the variable display game is not executed and the player is waiting for a customer who is not in the jackpot state (special game state), the player does not rush slowly and does not rush in the past. You can see the information about the predetermined effect (one event) that occurred during the special figure fluctuation display game.

[Player setting mode]
FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating a display screen of the display device 41 in the player setting mode.

When the player executes the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode while waiting for the customer during the customer waiting demo ((H) in FIG. 53), the hall / player setting mode processing (B0011) ) Displays the menu screen 590 of (mi) on the display device 41. On the menu screen, as various item display areas indicating items that can be set or adjusted by the player, the item display area 590a of "model introduction", the item display area 590b of "volume / brightness adjustment", and "customization of actual machine" Item display area 590c, item display area 590d of "beginner course", and item display area 590e of "game log" are displayed in a menu format.

By performing a touch operation on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25, the player can sequentially select items by the movement of the finger in the vertical direction (movement of the touched portion). The LED 596 of the effect button 25 may be turned on so as to encourage the movement of the finger. Further, by continuing the touch operation, the item selection can be performed in a loop. The selection of the designated item can be confirmed by performing a confirmation operation such as a pressing operation of the effect button 25. The item specified by the touch operation is displayed in a specific display mode.

(M) indicates a setting screen to be shifted when the item display area 590e of the "game log" is selected and a confirmation operation is performed. On this setting screen, items 591 of "YES" and "NO" for selecting whether or not to display the list 568, 569 of the executed effects, which are predetermined effects that have occurred in the past, and the list 568, 569 are displayed. Item 592 (multiple selections are possible) for selecting the type of executed effect (predetermined effect that has occurred in the past) to be performed, and item 593 for selecting the aggregation period of the executed effect are displayed. The aggregation period is the number of past games (for example, 50 games) for totaling the number of occurrences of the list 569 in (M).

Further, in (m), the display area 595 for confirming the selected item is displayed on the setting screen together with the display area 587 for "return". When the display area 587 of "Back" is selected, if there is an operation such as pressing the effect button 25, the screen returns to the menu screen. Further, when the "confirm" display area 589 is selected and there is an operation such as pressing down the effect button 25, the setting screen of (m) ends and the setting on the setting screen is confirmed. When "YES" of item 591 is selected, the screen may shift to the screen in which the list 568 of FIG. 53 (f) is displayed after the setting screen ends. When "NO" of item 591 is selected, the menu screen may be displayed after the setting screen is completed.

When a sub display device (liquid crystal display device or the like) other than the display device 41 is provided in the game machine 10, the above list 568, 569, setting screen, and menu screen may be displayed on the sub display device. ..

[Action / effect of the second embodiment]
The game machine 10 according to the second embodiment has a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) and an effect control means (effect control device 100) capable of executing an effect related to the game. 300), and when the result of the game is a special result (for example, a big hit result), a special gaming state (for example, a big hit state) that is advantageous to the player can be generated. When one event occurs, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute a specific effect related to the one event. One event is, for example, a predetermined effect A to D, a reach effect with the lowest expectation, and a big hit result within a specified number of games. The specific effect is, for example, a related display related to the predetermined effects A to D that have been executed, such as a suggestion image 551, a suggestion image 507, a pseudo-variation number display 505, a hold change notice effect, a list 568, and a list 569. Is. Further, the specific effect is, for example, a sound effect in a fanfare (FIG. 49), an image 575 (character images "fast" and "fastest"), and an image 581-583.

According to such a game machine 10, not only one event occurs, but also a specific effect related to one event can be executed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

In the second embodiment, when a predetermined effect occurs as one event, the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs a specific effect related to the predetermined effect at a plurality of timings according to the content of the predetermined effect. It is feasible with. Therefore, it is possible to make a strong impression that one event has occurred, as well as to improve the fun of the game by increasing the variation of the production.

In the second embodiment, there are cases where the specific effect is executed before a special result (for example, a big hit result) and a case where the specific effect is executed after the special result (for example, a big hit result). different. Therefore, the specific production is not monotonous and the interest of the game is improved.

In the second embodiment, the effect control means can select whether to execute the specific effect by display or by voice, depending on the degree of expectation that is a special result of one event or the content of one event. Therefore, the specific production becomes rich in variety, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the second embodiment, when one event occurs, the effect control means can execute a specific effect of displaying an image related to the one event on the display means (for example, the display device 41), and in the specific effect, the effect control means can execute the specific effect. The first image and the second image are combined by the display means, and the image related to the one event is displayed. Therefore, the fun of the specific production is visually increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the second embodiment, when one event occurs before the special result is obtained, the effect control means can execute the specific effect related to the one event after the special result is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to impress the player that the special effect is obtained through the occurrence of one event by executing the specific effect during the special game state (for example, during the big hit state).

In the second embodiment, as a specific effect, the effect control means displays an image suggesting that the number of times the game has been executed from the previous special result to the current special result is less than or equal to the specified number of times. Display after the special result of. Therefore, the player becomes aware of producing a special result (for example, a big hit result) quickly, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the second embodiment, the effect control means can execute a variable display game (for example, a decorative special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information (for example, a decorative special symbol) on the display means corresponding to the game. Therefore, it is possible to perform a reach effect in which a part of the identification information among the plurality of identification information is temporarily stopped or stopped. Among the plurality of reach effects, there is a predetermined reach effect (for example, N reach effect) that has the lowest expectation of a special result. After a special result is obtained via a predetermined reach effect, as one event, a specific effect suggesting that the expectation of the special result is the lowest can be executed. Therefore, the player can know that the degree of expectation is at least a big hit, and can obtain a sense of accomplishment.

In the second embodiment, the effect control means can execute a zone effect that changes the background displayed by the display means to a predetermined image as one event. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved with respect to the zone production.

In the second embodiment, a component member (for example, a center case 40) that forms a window portion that makes the display means visible from the front is provided. The effect control means can display a suggestion image (for example, a suggestion image 551b) suggesting that a zone effect has occurred as a specific effect. The suggested image has an annular shape along the window-side edge of the component. Therefore, the suggested image can be displayed as much as possible within a visible range.

In the second embodiment, the effect control means displays an image (for example, a suggestion image 507) suggesting that a predetermined mission on the effect has been achieved (or a mission effect has occurred) as one event as a specific effect. , Display on the display means after the mission is completed. When the mission is achieved, the loudness of the sound generated from the sound output means (speaker) or the brightness of the light generated from the light emitting means (predetermined LED) is changed. Therefore, it is possible to strongly notify the player that the mission has been completed.

In the second embodiment, the effect control means can execute a variable display game (for example, a decorative special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information (for example, a decorative special symbol) on the display means corresponding to the game. Yes, in one variation display game, it is possible to execute a pseudo continuous effect in which a pseudo variation for varying and temporarily stopping the identification information is performed a predetermined number of times. As one event, the effect control means displays a special image (for example, the character image "NEXT") on the display means when the identification information is temporarily stopped, and as a specific effect, the number of pseudo fluctuations (for example, "x2"). "X3") is displayed in the display means. The effect control means generates sounds (or lights) of different modes from the sound generating means (or light emitting means) when displaying a special image and displaying the number of pseudo fluctuations. Therefore, it is possible to strongly notify the appearance of the display of a special image, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the second embodiment, the game machine 10 executes a start storage means (for example, a game control device 100) capable of storing start memory as a game execution right, and a game based on the start memory stored by the start storage means. A pre-determination means (for example, a game control device 100) capable of pre-determining the result of the game related to the start memory is provided before. As a specific effect, the effect control means can execute a notice effect (for example, a pending change advance notice effect) based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, and as one event, a precursor effect (for example, a display device 41) is performed before the advance notice effect. (Character movement, etc.) is executed. The effect control means generates sounds (or lights) of different modes from the sound generating means (or light emitting means) in the precursor effect and the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to strongly notify the appearance of the precursor effect and the advance notice effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

The game machine 10 according to the second embodiment includes a game control means capable of executing a game and an effect control means capable of executing an effect related to the game, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is played. It is possible to generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player. When one event occurs, the effect control means can notify (display) information about the one event in a predetermined period. The information regarding one event is, for example, information related to a predetermined effect that has been executed, and is information shown in a suggestion image 551, a suggestion image 507, a number display of pseudo-variations 505, a list 568, and a list 569. Further, the information regarding one event is, for example, the information shown in the sound effect (FIG. 49) in the fanfare, the information shown in the image 575 (character image "fast" and "fastest"), and the information shown in the image 581-583. ..

In the second embodiment, the predetermined period is a period before and after deriving the result of the game (for example, a period from the start of the latter half of the reach to the end of the fanfare). Therefore, it is possible to strongly impress the player that a special result (for example, a big hit result) has been obtained through the occurrence of one event.

In the second embodiment, the game machine 10 includes an operable operating means (for example, an effect button 25). The effect control means can display information about one event in a predetermined period (for example, during fanfare time, waiting for customers) after the operation means is operated. Therefore, when the player does not want to display the information about one event, the information about one event is not displayed by not operating the operating means, and the request of the player can be met.

In the second embodiment, the predetermined period is a period in which the game is not being executed and the customer is waiting for a state in which the game is not in a special gaming state. Therefore, the player can see the information about one event without being rushed slowly.

In the second embodiment, the effect control means can display a list of various events that have occurred in a specific period. The specific period is, for example, during the running game, during the reach of the running game, one game before, the past 50 games, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation of one event, such as which one event is likely to occur in the case of a special result (for example, a big hit result), and the interest of the game is improved.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and content equivalent to the claims.

For example, when the above embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the game medium used for the game is a medal (coin) instead of the game ball, and the number of prize balls is replaced with the number of medals paid out. Then, in the slot machine, the payout rate (base) as performance information is the ratio (%) of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine, and the accessory ratio is the number of medals paid out in a predetermined period. Of these, the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out by various bonuses.

10 Game machine 25 Direction button 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 1st start winning opening (1st start winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special variable prize device 40 Center case 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Production control device (sub-board)
504 Pseudo-ream pattern 505 Number of times display 507 Suggested image 551 Suggested image 561 Expectation display 568 List 575 Image 633 Hold display 633a Hold display during fluctuation

Claims (1)

In a game machine including a game control means capable of executing a game and an effect control means capable of executing an effect related to the game.
The effect control means
As the effect related to the game, the effect of the first effect mode can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized in that the effect of the first effect mode executed as an effect related to the game can be switched to an effect of a second effect mode having a predetermined parameter different from that of the first effect mode. ..

Images